Instructions 95-8533: Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

Instructions 95-8533
Eagle Quantum Premier®

Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System
14.1 Rev: 5/13 95-8533

Table of Contents
Section 1 - Safety Section 3 - Installation
Alert Messages...............................................................1-1 Safety system Design Requirements..................... 3-1
Identifying the Area of Protection................................... 3-1
Identifying Wiring, Network (LON), and System Power
Section 2 - Introduction
Requirements......................................................... 3-1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION....................................................... 2-1 General Wiring Requirements................................ 3-1
Communications Loop................................................... 2-1 Power Wiring........................................................... 3-1
LON Communication Heartbeat..................................... 2-2 System Wiring (ATEX and IECEx).......................... 3-1
Theory of Operation....................................................... 2-2 Determining Power Requirements.......................... 3-3
Controller Logs............................................................... 2-4 EQ211xPS, EQ213xPS and EQ217xPS Power
Controller User Logic..................................................... 2-4 Supplies.......................................................... 3-5
Communication Network Fault Operation...................... 2-4 Backup Battery....................................................... 3-5
Multiple Wiring Faults..................................................... 2-5 Battery Charger...................................................... 3-5

EQP21x0PS(–X) Power Supplies........................... 3-6
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS.............................. 2-5
EQP2410PS(–P) Converter.................................... 3-6
System Controller........................................................... 2-5 Determining Power Requirements.......................... 3-7
Local Operating Network (LON)..................................... 2-6 Shield Grounding.................................................... 3-8
Network Extenders................................................. 2-6 Junction Box Grounding......................................... 3-8
EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and Response Time vs. System Size............................. 3-8
EQ2100PSM Power Supply Monitor....................... 2-7
Moisture Damage Protection.................................. 3-8
EQP21xxPS(–X) Power Supplies and
Electrostatic Discharge........................................... 3-8
EQP2410PS(–P) Converter............................................2-7
EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor.......................................2-7 ground fault monitor (GFM) installation............ 3-8
Field Devices.................................................................. 2-7 Mounting................................................................. 3-8
Flame Detectors..................................................... 2-7 Wiring..................................................................... 3-8
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete I/O Module........ 2-8
Network and Network Extender Installation.......3-9
EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module.......................... 2-8
Mounting................................................................. 3-9
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module.......................... 2-9
Wiring..................................................................... 3-9
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module.......................... 2-9
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module............ 2-10 Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) Installation..........3-11
EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module... 2-10 EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit........................ 3-11
EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module.....................2-11 Mounting................................................................3-11
EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module..................... 2-12 Wiring....................................................................3-11
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit.......... 2-12 EQ22xxIDCGF Series Initiating Device Circuit Ground
EQ22xxDCU / EQ22xxDCUEX Digital Fault...................................................................... 3-12
Communication Units.................................... 2-13 Mounting............................................................... 3-12
PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse................................. 2-13 Wiring................................................................... 3-12
OPECL Open Path Eclipse................................... 2-13 EQ22xxIDCSC Series Initiating Device Circuit Short
UD10 DCU Emulator............................................ 2-13 Circuit................................................................... 3-13
Mounting............................................................... 3-13
Wiring................................................................... 3-13
Table of Contents – Continued
EQ3XXX Controller Installation........................... 3-14 analog input module installation........................ 3-40
Enclosure Requirements.............................................. 3-14 Mounting...................................................................... 3-40
Mounting...................................................................... 3-14 Wiring........................................................................... 3-40
Serial Interface Board.................................................. 3-14 Configuration................................................................ 3-41
Wiring........................................................................... 3-15
intelligent protection module installation.....3-42
Power Wiring......................................................... 3-15
Wiring..............................................................................3-42
Electrical Connections.......................................... 3-15
Configuration...................................................................3-45
Controller to Controller Communication....................... 3-19
Configuration................................................................ 3-22 Gas Detector Location and Installation...................3-46
Software Defined Addresses................................ 3-22 Environments and Substances that Affect Gas Detector
Performance......................................................... 3-46
EQ3XXX Redundant controller installation.... 3-22
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with
Enclosure Requirements.............................................. 3-22 Det‑Tronics H2S/O2 Sensors or other Two-Wire
Mounting...................................................................... 3-22 4‑20 mA Devices.................................................. 3-47
Wiring........................................................................... 3-22 Assembly and Wiring Procedure........................... 3-47
LON Wiring................................................................... 3-22 Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2
Sensors......................................................... 3-48
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL).................................... 3-22
EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit used with
Configuration................................................................ 3-23
PointWatch/DuctWatch......................................... 3-49
S3 Configuration................................................... 3-23
Assembly and Wiring Procedure........................... 3-49
Controller Addresses............................................ 3-23
Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch....... 3-49
Modbus................................................................. 3-23
EQ22xxdcuex Digital Communication Unit (used with
ControlNet............................................................ 3-23 Det-Tronics Combustible Gas Sensors)................ 3-50
EQ21XXPS series Power Supply and Mounting............................................................... 3-50
power supply monitor Installation..................... 3-23 Wiring................................................................... 3-50
Mounting...................................................................... 3-23 Sensor Separation with DCUEX........................... 3-51
Wiring........................................................................... 3-23 EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module................ 3-53
Startup......................................................................... 3-25 Mounting............................................................... 3-53
Measuring Battery Voltage and Charging Current........ 3-26 Wiring................................................................... 3-53
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action...... 3-55
eqp2XX0PS(–X) power supplIES and
redundancy module installation......................... 3-26 Jumpers................................................................ 3-55
Address Setting.................................................... 3-55
Mounting...................................................................... 3-26
EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module ................ 3-55
Wiring........................................................................... 3-26
Mounting............................................................... 3-55
Startup......................................................................... 3-29
Wiring................................................................... 3-55
edio module installation.......................................... 3-29 Jumpers................................................................ 3-56
Configuration................................................................ 3-33 Address Setting.................................................... 3-56
8 channel DCIO Installation..................................... 3-34 System Configuration............................................... 3-57
Mounting...................................................................... 3-34 Setting Device Network addresses.............................. 3-57
Wiring........................................................................... 3-34 Overview of Network Addresses........................... 3-57
Configuration................................................................ 3-38 Setting Field Device Addresses............................ 3-57
8 channel relay module installation.................. 3-38 TYPICAL APPLICATIONS................................................... 3-57
Mounting...................................................................... 3-38
Wiring........................................................................... 3-38
Configuration................................................................ 3-39
Section 4 - Operation EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR........................ 4-18
System Controller....................................................... 4-1 eq2220GFM ground fault monitor......................... 4-18

Pushbuttons................................................................... 4-1
EQ22xxIDC series Initiating Device Circuit......... 4-19
Controller Status Indicators............................................ 4-2
Text Display.................................................................... 4-2 EQ22xxDCU and EQ22xxDCUEX Digital
Controller Menu Options................................................ 4-2 communication Units.................................................. 4-19
Controller Audible Alarm................................................. 4-6 EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module......................... 4-20

ControlNet Status Indicators (Optional).......................... 4-7
Sequence of Events During a Configuration Data EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module......................... 4-20
Download................................................................ 4-7
EQ24xxNE Network Extender................................... 4-20
Controller Redundancy.................................................. 4-9
system startup............................................................. 4-21
Enhanced Discrete I/O Module................................4-11
Pre-Operation Checks.................................................. 4-21
Power-Up Sequence.....................................................4-11
General Start-up Procedures....................................... 4-22
8 CHANNEL DCIO Module.............................................. 4-12 Startup Procedure for Controller.................................. 4-23
Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-12 Startup Procedure for EDIO Module............................ 4-23
8 CHANNEL relay Module........................................... 4-13 Startup Procedure for DCIO Module............................ 4-24
Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-13
analog input module................................................. 4-14

intelligent protection module............................. 4-15

Embedded Logic - Purpose......................................... 4-15
Embedded Logic - Control Transfer Sequence Description...4-15
Embedded Logic - S3 Configurable Options................ 4-16
Embedded Logic - Operation....................................... 4-17
Section 5 - Maintenance Section 6 - Specifications
EQ3XXX Controller................................................................ 6-1
Routine Maintenance................................................... 5-1
EQ3LTM LON Termination Module........................................ 6-2
Batteries......................................................................... 5-1
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete I/O Module ...................... 6-3
Manual Check of Output Devices................................... 5-1
EQ3700 DCIO Module........................................................... 6-5
O-Ring Maintenance...................................................... 5-1
EQ3720 Relay Module.......................................................... 6-6
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE............................................ 5-1 EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module......................................... 6-7
HART Interface Module......................................................... 6-7
Calibration and Adjustments................................... 5-2
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module............................. 6-8
Calibration Algorithm A For Manual Calibration of Universal
DCU........................................................................ 5-2 EQ21xxPS Power Supplies................................................... 6-9
Normal Calibration.................................................. 5-2 EQP2xx0PS(–x) Power Supplies......................................... 6-10
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-3 Redundancy Module Quint-Diode/40.................................. 6-10
Calibration Algorithm C For Combustible Gas DCUs and EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor.....................................6-11
Automatic Calibration of Universal DCUs............... 5-3 EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit..........................6-11
Routine Calibration................................................. 5-3 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor..................................... 6-12
Initial Installation and Sensor Replacement — EQ22xxDCU Series Digital Communication Unit................ 6-13
Combustible Gas............................................. 5-4 EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module................................... 6-13
Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas......................... 5-4 EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module.................................... 6-14
Calibration Algorithm D For Universal DCUs with O2 EQ24xxNE Network Extender............................................. 6-14
Sensor.................................................................... 5-5
EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module.............. 6-15
Normal Calibration.................................................. 5-5
Combustible Gas Sensor..................................................... 6-15
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-5
Electrochemical Sensors..................................................... 6-15
Calibration Algorithm G For DCUs with PointWatch or
EQ21xxPS Power Supply.................................................... 6-15
DuctWatch.............................................................. 5-6
Routine Calibration................................................. 5-6
Sensor Replacement.............................................. 5-6 appendix A — fm approval description................. a-1
Device Calibration Logs and Records.................. 5-6 appendix B — CSA certification description.......b-1
troubleshooting........................................................... 5-6 appendix C — atex and iecex certification............C-1
REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................... 5-8 Appendix D — EQP Marine, USCG Approval............D-1
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN........................................... 5-8 Appendix E — CE Mark...................................................E-1
ORDERING INFORMATION................................................. 5-8 appendix f — rocker switch table......................... f-1
appendix g — DEVICE model matriCES.................... g-1

Instructions
Eagle Quantum Premier®

Fire and Gas Detection/
Releasing System
Section 1
Safety
Alert Messages
CAUTION!
The following Alert Messages, DANGER, WARNING, 1. Be sure to read and understand the entire
CAUTION, and IMPORTANT are used throughout this instruction manual before installing or operating the
manual and on the system to alert the reader and Eagle Quantum Premier® system. Only qualified
operator to dangerous conditions and/or important personnel should install, maintain or operate the
operational or maintenance information. system.
DANGER! 2. The wiring procedures in this manual are intended

Identifies immediate hazards that WILL result in to ensure proper functioning of the devices under
severe personal injury or death. normal conditions. However, because of the many
variations in wiring codes and regulations, total
compliance with these ordinances cannot be
WARNING! guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring and
equipment installation meets or exceeds the latest
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD revisions of the appropriate NFPA Standards,
result in severe personal injury or death. National Electrical Code (NEC), and all local
ordinances. If in doubt, consult the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) before wiring the system.
CAUTION!
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the
Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that COULD manufacturer’s recommendations.
result in minor personal injury or damage to
equipment or property. 3. Some Eagle Quantum Premier devices contain
semiconductor devices that are susceptible to
damage by electrostatic discharge. An
IMPORTANT! electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and
A brief statement of fact, experience or importance discharge when an object is touched. Always
that is given as an aid or explanation. observe the normal precautions for handling
electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. use of a wrist
strap (if available) and proper grounding.
WARNING!
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior 4. To prevent unwanted actuation, alarms and
to removing a junction box cover or opening a extinguishing devices must be secured prior to
detector assembly with power applied. performing system tests.
14.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2013 Rev: 5/13 95-8533

Section 2 instruments. Typical output equipment includes
solenoids, strobes, and horns. All equipment is
Introduction monitored for wiring fault conditions.
For complete system integration, the Controller has

System Description the capability to communicate with other systems
such as PLCs and DCSs. Different communication
The Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) system combines protocols are supported, allowing the Controller to
"fire detection and extinguishing agent release" and communicate with other systems either directly or
"hazardous gas monitoring" in one complete package. through communication gateways.
The system is intended for use in hazardous locations
and is designed to meet the requirements of approval note
agencies from around the world. For specific information relating to the SIL 2 rated
EQP system, refer to manual number 95-8599.
The system consists of a Controller and a number of
addressable microprocessor based field devices.
T h e C o n t ro l l e r c o o rd i n a t e s s y s t e m d e v i c e Communications Loop
configuration, monitoring, annunciation, and control, Eagle Quantum Premier utilizes a Det-Tronics
while the field devices communicate their status and Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), a version of Echelon’s
alarm conditions to the Controller. Local Operation Network (LON) customized
specifically for Eagle Quantum Premier. This network
The EQP controller can be arranged in a redundant provides several key advantages:
configuration, thereby increasing the availability of the
system. The controllers work in “Master” and “Hot • ANSI/NFPA Class X performance of SLC
Standby” mode. • Peer-to-peer communications
• Short message formats
Various combinations of field devices can be
configured as part of the system. The actual selection • Expandability
depends on the requirements of the application and
the regulations that cover the type of protection The Controller utilizes several mechanisms to
required. See Figure 2-1 for a block diagram of the continuously check the LON loop for fault conditions,
Eagle Quantum Premier system. thereby providing the highest level of reliable
communication.
All field devices are tied into a communication loop
that starts and ends at the Controller. Each device Every device on the LON loop has the ability to
connected to the communication loop is assigned a communicate with the Controller at any time. This is
unique identity by setting its address switches. All typically referred to as distributed peer-to-peer
other device operation parameters are configured communications. This design allows for immediate
through Det-Tronics “Safety System Software”. These alarm messages to be sent from the field devices to
selections define the type of device and how it is to the Controller.
operate. This system configuration data is then
downloaded into the Controller. All messages are kept short in order to maximize
network performance. This minimizes network
A p ro g r a m m e d C o n t ro l l e r i s c o n f i g u re d t o bottlenecks.
automatically download the configuration data into the
individual devices when they first communicate with The Eagle Quantum Premier system is easily modified
the Controller. to accommodate design changes or plant expansions.
This can involve adding LON sections, repositioning
In addition to Det-Tronics advanced flame and gas LON sections, or removing LON sections from the loop.
detectors, Eagle Quantum Premier offers the There are LON communication implementation details
capability of incorporating third party fire and gas that affect and limit how the LON loop is changed.
protection equipment into the system. These can be
either input or output devices. Typical input devices Only devices that have been approved for use with
include manual fire alarm "call boxes", heat detectors, Eagle Quantum Premier can be connected up to the
and analog combustible or toxic gas measurement LON. All approved devices have been tested and
certified to operate properly on the LON.
14.1 2-1 95-8533

GAS DETECTION FIRE DETECTION CONFIGURABLE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
COMBUSTIBLE, TOXIC, CONTACT

POINTWATCH OR CLOSURE CONFIGURABLE
OTHER 4-20 MA INPUT DEVICES DRY CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT POINTS
DIGITAL INITIATING
X3301 X3302 UVHT/C7050 UV UV/IR IR
COMMUNICATION DEVICE 8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR
UNITS CIRCUIT
NOTE: CHANNELS CAN BE CONFIGURED
AS EITHER INPUTS OR OUTPUTS.
UD10 / DCU
ANALOG
INPUT 8 4-20 MA INPUTS
PIRECL
MODULE
GAS
DETECTOR
INTELLIGENT 2 SMOKE DETECTOR LOOPS
PROTECTION PRECONFIGURED INPUTS
OPECL MODULE
GAS PRECONFIGURED OUTPUTS
DETECTOR UNSUPERVISED INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
RELAY 8 UNSUPERVISED
MODULE RELAY OUTPUT POINTS
8 RELAY
8 DRY CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT POINTS
APOLLO AGENT FIRE
DEVICES RELEASE SUPPRESSION
MODULES (SOL)
TROUBLE RELAY
(NC CONTACT)
POWER SIGNAL HORNS
NETWORK ASH
SUPPLY EQP CONTROLLER AUDIBLE &
EXTENDER MODULE
MONITOR MODULES BEACONS
CONTROLNET OPTIONAL ONBOARD

AC 8 CHANNEL EDIO MODULE
(OPTIONAL SERIAL SERIAL
BATTERY
POWER INTERFACE) INTERFACE INTERFACE
CHARGER SYSTEM
INPUT
POWER
– + – + CHANNELS CAN BE CONFIGURED AS INPUTS,

OUTPUTS, SMOKE/HEAT DETECTORS,
RS-232 CONFIGURATION CLASS A INPUTS, OR CLASS A OUTPUTS.
PC
RS-232
RS-232
RS-485
HSSL
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)
HARDWIRED I/O RS-485 MODBUS

INTERFACE
K2114
SERIAL INTERFACE
Figure 2-1—Block Diagram of Eagle Quantum Premier System
LON COMMUNICATION HEARTBEAT heartbeat for a period of time, the device will go into a
LON fault isolation. In this situation, the device opens
The Controller continuously broadcasts a heartbeat
one side of the LON and listens for a heartbeat on the
signal over the LON loop. This heartbeat is used for
other side. If the device doesn’t receive a heartbeat, it
verifying the integrity of the LON loop and for keeping
listens on the other side of the LON and opens the
the field devices from going into a fault isolation
opposite LON connection.
mode. Once every second, the heartbeat contains the
current time and date, which are used by the field
devices to log status events and calibrations. THEORY OF OPERATION
During normal operation, the Controller continuously
The Controller continuously tests LON continuity by
checks the system for fault conditions and executes
sending out a heartbeat on one LON port and then
user defined programmed logic that coordinates the
listening for it on the other LON port. The Controller
control of the field devices. At the same time, the field
also broadcasts the heartbeat signal in the opposite
devices are continuously monitoring for device based
direction around the loop. This ensures that all field
fault and alarm conditions.
devices, the LON Network Extenders (NE), and
communication wiring are correctly passing the digital
When a fault condition occurs, the Controller displays
information around the loop.
the fault condition on the Vacuum Fluorescent Text
Display, activates the appropriate fault LED(s),
The field devices use the heartbeat as a mechanism
activates the Trouble signal using the Controller’s
to ensure that there is a communication path back to
internal enunciator, and de-energizes the Controller’s
the Controller. If the field device does not receive a
Trouble relay.
14.1 2-2 95-8533

Table 2-1—Controller Based Faults Table 2-2—Field Device Based Faults
Controller Faults Trouble LON Fault Trouble Field Device Faults Trouble Trouble
Shown on Text Display LED LED Relay Shown on Text Display LED Relay
Controller Fault X X 290 Volt Fault X X
Device Offline X X AC Failed X X
Extra LON Device X X Battery Fault X X
Invalid Config X X Beam Block X X
Lon Fault X X X Calibration Fault X X
LON Ground Fault X X Channel Open X X
Power Fail 1 X X Channel Short X X
Power Fail 2 X X Dirty Optics X X
RTC Fault X X Ground Fault Negative X X
Redundancy Fault* X X Ground Fault Positive X X
*Only for controller pair configured for redundancy. IR Auto Oi Fault X X
IR Fault X X
Controller based fault conditions include the Controller IR Manual Oi Fault X X
status and LON communications such as the Low Aux Power Fault X X
heartbeat being sent around the loop and the field Missing IR Sensor Fault X X
device loss of communications. Controller based fault Missing UV Sensor Fault X X
conditions are listed in Table 2-1.
Power Supply Fault X X
Sensor Fault X X
Field device based fault conditions are transmitted to
the Controller, where they are then annunciated. Refer Supply Voltage Fault X X
to Table 2-2 for a listing of field device faults. Each Tx Lamp Fault X X
field device transmits its status to the Controller UV Auto Oi Fault X X
on a regular basis. UV Fault X X
UV Manual Oi Fault X X
When an alarm condition occurs, the Controller
displays the alarm condition on the text display,
activates the appropriate Alarm LED(s), and activates Each field device must communicate alarm and fault
the alarm signal using the Controller’s internal conditions to the Controller. The timing for transmitting
annunciator. alarms and faults to the Controller is displayed in
Table 2-3.
Table 2-3—Eagle Quantum Premier Status Update Rates
Controller Type # of Devices Output Only Input – No Exception Input – With Exception Input – With Exception
ARM IDC DCU PIRECL
SAM U-Series (UV & UVIR) DCIO, EDIO, AIM
Relay Module, IPM
ASH Module
X-Series
OPECL
1 to 100 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
EQ3001 101 to 200 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 1 Second
201 to 246 5 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 1 Second
1 to 50 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
EQ3150* 51 to 100 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 2 Seconds 1 Second
101 to 150 5 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 1 Second
EQ3016 1 to 16 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second 1 Second
*ASH Module cannot be used with EQ3150 Controller.
14.1 2-3 95-8533

Note COMMUNICATION NETWORK FAULT OPERATION
All fault and alarm conditions are latched on the
During normal operation, the Controller is continuously
Controller. To reset the Controller, conditions
broadcasting a heartbeat around the communication
indicated on the text display must currently be in
loop as shown in Figure 2-2. The Controller
the OFF state. Pushing the reset button then
broadcasts the heartbeat in both directions. At the
initiates a Controller reset. Active alarms will
same time, the field devices are transmitting status
remain through a Controller reset.
information to the Controller over the communication
loop.
CONTROLLER LOGS
Every field device except the network extender has
The controller has an internal alarm and event log.
two LON fault isolation relays. Each relay is tied to a
The logs can be accessed via the S 3 software
communication port on the device. When a field
configuration ports (Configuration Port or Port 3) using
device fails to receive the heartbeat from the
a RS-232 serial cable and a Windows ™ computer.
Controller, the device initiates a LON fault isolation
The controller can save up to 4,095 alarms and events
routine. The isolation routine disconnects one of the
in the controller memory.
communication ports via one of the LON fault isolation
relays. The device listens for a heartbeat on the
CONTROLLER USER LOGIC communication port that is connected. If a heartbeat
is not found, the routine then disconnects the other
The Controller continuously executes the user logic
communication port and listens for a heartbeat on the
programs that are programmed using S 3 software.
connected side. The process is repeated until either
The user logic programs are set up in the same
a heartbeat is located or a LON fault timeout period of
fashion as IEC 61131-3 programmable logic
two hours is reached. The LON fault isolation routine
programmed into Programmable Logic Controllers
is disabled and the LON fault isolation relays are
(PLCs). Block diagram logic gates are tied together
closed when the LON fault timeout period has
with inputs, outputs, and other logic gates to perform
elapsed. The LON fault isolation routine will be
a specific task. A number of tasks can be tied
enabled when the device again receives a heartbeat.
together to perform a system function.
For a single wiring fault, the field devices with the fault
Typical programmed functions include flame/gas
will isolate the fault by opening LON fault isolation
voting, timing delays, timing executions, latching
relays. After the field devices isolate the wiring fault,
conditions, alarm and trouble notification, suppression
communications will be resumed between the
control, condition control, and process shutdown
Controller and field devices. Refer to Figure 2-3.
notification.
The Controller executes program logic by starting with NODE 4 NODE 5
the first logic page of the first program and then NODE 3 NODE 6
progressing onto subsequent pages of the same

program. In turn, subsequent programs are then NODE 2 NODE 7
executed. EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
®
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Every one hundred milliseconds, the Controller will

Safety System Controller
NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier
NODE 8
Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
start executing the user logic that is programmed into

D1851
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence
the Controller. Within this logic execution cycle, the Figure 2-2—Normal Communication over the LON
Controller will execute as many of the logic pages as
possible. If all programmed logic is executed in a WIRING FAULT
NODE 4 NODE 5
cycle, the Controller will start executing program logic
NODE 3 NODE 6
with the next cycle. Otherwise, subsequence logic
execution cycles are used to finish executing the
remaining logic gates. Only when all the logic gates NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7
have been executed will the Controller start over. The EQP
CONTROLLER
Controller will start executing the first logic page of DET-TRONICS
®

NODE 1 NODE 8
the first program at the beginning of the next logic
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power

D1852
cycle.
Figure 2-3—Communication over the LON with a Single Wiring Fault
14.1 2-4 95-8533

NODE 4 NODE 5
WIRING FAULTS
• 8 programmable unsupervised relay outputs
NODE 3 NODE 6
• RS-485 Modbus RTU communication interface that
supports coils, discrete inputs, and holding
NODE 2 PATH A PATH B NODE 7 registers
EQP
CONTROLLER
DET-TRONICS
®
• Optional ControlNet communication board that
supports redundant communication channels.
NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier
Time & Date

Fire Alarm
High Gas
Low Gas
Trouble
Cntrl Flt
Lon Fault
Inhibit
Out Inhibit
Ack
Power
Supr
Silence
NODE 8
D1853
• Optional Serial Interface Board (required for
Figure 2-4—Communication over LON with Multiple Wiring Faults controller redundancy).
MULTIPLE WIRING FAULTS

In the event of multiple wiring faults on the LON, the
devices between the faults will continue to function,
but the faults will prevent them from communicating
with the Controller. See Figure 2-4. In this example,
nodes 1 to 4 communicate using one Controller port
(path A) and nodes 7 and 8 use the other Controller
port (path B). Nodes 5 and 6 are unable to report to
the Controller because they are isolated by the two
Figure 2-5—System Controller
wiring faults. If a device is prevented from
communicating with the Controller, the text display on
the Controller will show the message “Device Offline”.
Controller Redundancy
IMPORTANT! The EQP controllers can be configured as a redundant
Since it is impossible to predict where a network pair. See Figure 2-6. The redundancy scheme is a hot
fault might occur or exactly what effect it will standby system that offers the following primary
have on actual system operation, it is important features:
to diagnose and repair any fault as soon as
possible after it is detected to ensure continuous, • Automatic configuration of the standby controller
uninterrupted system operation. • Bumpless transfer
• Forced and automatic switchover
MAJOR COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS • No downtime on controller replacement
The system has three (3) main component groups — • Automatic synchronization between controllers
the System Controller, LON (Local Operating • Increased system availability
Network), and Intelligent Field Devices.
SYSTEM CONTROLLER LON
The Controller (see Figure 2-5) performs all RS-232 MODBUS

SERIAL LINK RS-485
communication, command, and control functions for DCS/PLC/HMI
the system. The Controller supports both “Static” and

“Programmable” logic. Other features include: CONTROLLER A
S3 LON ADDRESS 1
CONFIGURATION
• Redundant controller capability SOFTWARE
HIGH SPEED
RS-232
• User pushbutton controls (reset, acknowledge, etc.) SERIAL LINK
• “Real time” system clock ONE PROJECT FILE

CONTROLLER B
LOADED TO
LON ADDRESS 2
• Internal alarm sounder CONTROLLER A
A2275
• Vacuum fluorescent text based display that shows

current system status Figure 2-6— Block Diagram of EQP System
with Redundant Controllers
• 8 programmable unsupervised inputs
14.1 2-5 95-8533

During normal operation one controller acts as the Controller-to-Controller Communication (SLC485)
“Master” while the other acts as the “Hot Standby”.
The EQP controllers can be configured to
communicate with up to 12 controllers via RS-485
Terminology used for redundancy:
communication. The controller-to-controller scheme
Master controller This is the normal mode for provides the ability to meet NFPA 72 SLC requirements
non-redundant and master with the following primary features:
controllers. User logic is
executed, outputs are being • Modular trouble and alarm configuration
controlled and all serial ports • Multiple zone application with controller-to-controller
are active. communication
Standby controller This controller is receiving all • Multiple media options.
inputs but does not have any
control over the outputs and
user logic is not executed. The EQP Supervising System (EQPSS)
standby controller receives The Det-Tronics EQP controllers can be supervised
update information from the via the EQPSS using PCs and HMI. Each EQPSS PC
master controller to ensure a can communicate with up to 12 EQP controllers over
bumpless transfer should a an Ethernet. This is a Det-Tronics solution. Please
controller switchover occur. consult the factory for more information.
Primary controller The controller assigned
address 1. EQP Marine Application System
Secondary controller T h e c o n t r o l l e r a s s i g n e d For information regarding EQP Marine Application
address 2. Systems, refer to Appendix D.
Bumpless transfer During a controller switchover

no change in output will occur LOCAL OPERATING NETWORK (LON)
due to the switchover. The LON is a fault tolerant, two wire, digital
communication network. The circuit is arranged in a
Serial Interface Board loop starting and ending at the Controller. The circuit
supports up to 246 intelligent field devices spread
An optional serial board is available that supports up over a distance of up to 10,000 meters (32,500 feet).
to four additional serial ports. See Table 2-4. For a
redundant controller configuration, the board is Note
required in both controllers. All LON devices support ANSI/NFPA 72 Class X
communication with the Controller.
Table 2-4—Ports on Optional Serial Interface Board
Network Extenders
Port Name Comm Function Transmitted signals can travel a maximum distance of
Serial Port 2 RS485 ModBus (Master/Slave) 2,000 meters through LON communication wire. At
Ground Fault Monitored, the end of this distance, a network extender (see
Isolated Figure 2-7) must be installed to rebroadcast the
communications into the next wire segment. For
Serial Port 3 RS232 ModBus (Master/Slave) every network extender added, the length of the
S3 Configuration communications loop extends up to 2,000 meters.
Serial Port 4 RS232 ModBus (Master/Slave) Due to propagation delays around the loop, the
maximum loop length is limited to 10,000 meters.
HSSL Redundancy RS232 Redundant Controller to
Port Controller Only NoteS
A n e t w o r k ex t e n d e r i s r e q u i r e d f o r
communication loops greater than 60 nodes.
14.1 2-6 95-8533

EQP21XXPS(–X) Power Supplies and
EQP2410PS(–P) Converter
The Power Supplies and Converter provide main and
backup power to the EQP System in ordinary and
marine applications. Refer to Section 3 of this manual
for complete information.
EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor

The EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor (see Figure
2-8) provides ground fault monitoring in a system that
Figure 2-7—Eagle Quantum Premier Network Extender includes a floating 24 Vdc power source. The device
detects ground fault conditions on +/– power and all
secondary I/O circuits. A positive or negative ground
Communication wire segment lengths are
fault condition is indicated immediately by local
dependant upon physical and electrical
LEDs, and by a relay contact after a 10 second time
characteristics of the cable. Refer to the
delay. The ground fault monitor is intended to be
installation section for LON cable wire
mounted in the same enclosure as the controller.
information.
No more than six network extenders may be

used on the communication loop.
When a network extender is installed in the

communication loop, up to 40 field devices can
be installed per network segment. The network
segment is the wiring segment between two
network extenders or between a network
extender and a controller.
Figure 2-8—Ground Fault Monitor
EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and

FIELD DEVICES
EQ2100PSM Power Supply Monitor
The Power Supply, Power Supply Monitor, and backup Flame Detectors
batteries are used to provide power to the system.
For flame detector installation, operation,
The power supply monitor communicates trouble
maintenance, specifications and ordering information,
conditions to the Controller. Monitored status
refer to Table 2-5.
conditions include: power supply failure, loss of AC
power, loss of battery power, power ground fault, AC
For information regarding USCG Approval of the
and DC voltage (hi/low level), and backup battery
X3301 Flame Detector, refer to Appendix D.
current charge levels.
note
The Power Supply provides main and backup power
Existing Eagle Quantum field devices such as
to the EQP System. The device includes many
EQ22xxUV and EQ22xxUVIR are supported by the
features such as voltage regulation, high efficiency,
Eagle Quantum Premier system (not FM Approved).
and high power factor.
Table 2-5—Flame Detector Manuals
An equalize switch is located on the front panel of the
charger for manual activation, or a multi-mode Detector Manual Number
electronic timer can be used for automatic activation.
X3301 95-8527
Steady state output voltage remains within +/– 1/2%
X3301A 95-8527 & 95-8534
of the setting from no load to full load for AC input
voltages within +/– 10% of the nominal input voltage. X3302 95-8576
X5200 95-8546
X2200 95-8549
X9800 95-8554
UVHT 95-8570
14.1 2-7 95-8533

EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module EQ3700 8 Channel DCIO Module
The 8 Channel EDIO Module (see Figure 2-9) expands The 8 Channel Discrete Input/Output (DCIO) Module
the Input and Output capability of the Eagle Quantum (see Figure 2-10) consists of eight individually
Premier System. configured channels. Each channel is configured as
either an input or output with the appropriate wiring
The unit is designed to provide continuous and supervision. Wiring supervision includes none, open
automated fire/gas protection, while ensuring system circuits, and "open and short" circuits. In addition to
operation through continuous supervision of System defining the type of supervision, an input channel is
Inputs/Outputs. also configured to generate the appropriate static
logic alarm message to the controller.
The EDIO module provides eight channels of
configurable input or output points that can be Note
programmed for supervised or unsupervised NFPA 72 requires wire supervision selection for
operation. Each input point can accept fire detection fire detection and notification devices (IDC, NAC,
devices such as heat, smoke, or unitized flame supervisory and releasing devices).
detectors. Each output point can be configured for
signaling or releasing output operation. Each channel Heat, smoke, or unitized flame detectors can be wired
on the module is provided with individual indicators into channels defined as inputs. Horns, strobes/
for active and fault conditions. beacons, and solenoids can be wired into channels
defined as outputs.
important
For Class A wiring, two input/output channels are Note
combined, thereby supporting up to four input/ The DCIO outputs only support equipment that
output circuits. operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes
per channel).
NOTE
An input must be active for at least 750 The DCIO has two device status LEDs, as well as two
milliseconds in order to be recognized. LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one
green LED indicates power, while the other amber
The EDIO module can be mounted directly to a panel, LED indicates a LON CPU fault. For each channel,
or it can be DIN rail mounted. System status can be one red LED indicates channel activation and the
determined using the trouble-shooting procedures, other amber LED indicates a fault condition when
Eagle Quantum Safety System Software (S3) and the wiring supervision is defined for the channel.
status indicators on the module.
Refer to the DCIO Specification Data sheet (form
Refer to the Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module number 90-1149) for additional information.
Specification Data sheet (form number 90-1189) for
additional information.
Figure 2-10—DCIO Module
Figure 2-9—Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module
14.1 2-8 95-8533

EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module
The 8 Channel Relay Module (see Figure 2-11) The 8 Channel Analog Input Module (see Figure 2-12)
consists of eight individually configured output provides a means of connecting devices with a
channels. calibrated 4-20 mA output signal to the Eagle
Quantum Premier System.
Note
The relay module only supports equipment that The Analog Input Module (AIM) provides 8
operates on 24 vdc (not to exceed 2 amperes) at configurable channels that can be set for either
each output channel. combustible gas mode or universal mode. The
combustible gas mode provides a number of
The relay module has two LEDs for the device and automatically programmed settings, and alarm
two LEDs for each channel. On the device level, one thresholds that are limited to approval body
green LED indicates power, while the other amber requirements. The universal mode is used for generic
LED indicates a LON CPU fault. For each channel, devices where control over all configuration
one red LED indicates channel activation and the parameters is required. All devices must provided
other amber LED indicates that the module operating their own calibration facilities.
voltage is low or that the module has not been
configured (all eight channel LEDs blink). For fire detector 4-20 mA inputs, the Analog Input
Module (AIM) is certified for use as an NFPA 72 Class
Refer to the Relay Module Specification Data sheet B Approved input.
(form number 90-1181) for additional information.
Refer to the Analog Input Module Specification Data
sheet (for m number 90-1183) for additional
information.
Figure 2-11—Eight Channel Relay Module
Figure 2-12—Eight Channel Analog Input Module
14.1 2-9 95-8533

EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke & Heat Module
The IPM (see Figure 2-13) is designed to provide The Addressable Smoke and Heat (ASH) Module (see
continuous and automated local area fire protection, Figure 2-14) is an interface device designed to provide
while monitoring system operation through continuous continuous and automated fire protection for the EQP
supervision of its Inputs/Outputs and Local Operating system.
Network/Signalling Line Circuit (LON/SLC) connection to
the EQP controller. The ASH module is located directly on the LON of the
EQP system, with a loop of up to 64 addressable devices
In addition the module contains a unique “embedded tied into the ASH module. This allows all of the flame,
logic program” that if enabled during configuration gas, and addressable smoke and heat detectors to run
allows the IPM to perform local area protection in a on one system, enabling the EQP controller to annunciate
“back-up mode” without controller interaction. a fire alarm from either its own LON based I/O, or from the
connected addressable smoke and heat detection loops.
The IPM utilizes eight pre-configured Input/Output (I/O) The EQP controller can support up to 10 ASH modules.
channels to perform its monitoring, supervision and
mitigation functions. The ASH module can support a variety of Apollo Discovery
and XP95 devices, including smoke, heat, manual call,
On the input side, three supervised channels provide sounders, beacons and I/O modules. The addressable
connections for an Abort station, a Manual Release devices are configured individually via the S3 software.
station and a Supervisory device. Two additional input
channels (zones) provide connections for “two-wire” To ensure reliable system operation, the ASH module
conventional (non-relay based) smoke and heat continuously monitors its input and output circuits for
detectors. opens and short circuit conditions.
On the output side, three supervised outputs provide During normal operation, the ASH module continuously
connections for a notification appliance such as a checks the loop for fault conditions and executes user
bell, horn or lamp and two releasing circuits for a main defined programmed logic that coordinates the control
and reserve or secondary agent release. of the field devices. The ASH module reports any device
based fault and alarm conditions to the EQP controller.
Each channel on the module is provided with
individual indicators for active and fault conditions. The EQP Controller continuously monitors the status of
the ASH module, as well as the status of each device
Refer to the Intelligent Protection Module Specification connected to the ASH module. ASH module alarm and
Data sheet (form number 90-1184) for additional fault status conditions are logged in the EQP controller.
information.
System status can be determined using S3 software or
the status indicators on the ASH module, where LEDs
annunciate power on, faults, or an active device on the
loop.
Refer to the ASH module instruction manual (form

number 95-8654) for additional information.
Figure 2-13—Intelligent Protection Module
Figure 2-14—Addressable Smoke & Heat Module
14.1 2-10 95-8533

EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module The device can monitor and control two output
devices (24 vdc rated) that are programmed and
The EQ25xxARM Series Agent Release Module (ARM)
energized together. The release circuits are
(see Figure 2-15) provides agent release or deluge
compatible with a variety of solenoid or initiator based
pre-action capability. The device is controlled by
suppression systems.
programmable logic in the Controller. Time delay,
abort and manual release sequences allow the device
The release circuit is supervised for open circuit
output to be programmed for use in unique
conditions. If a trouble condition occurs (open circuit
applications.
or solenoid supply voltage less than 19 volts), it will
be indicated at the Controller. Each output is rated at
The device is field programmed to operate in one of
2 amperes and auxiliary input terminals are provided
the following modes:
for additional 24 vdc output power where needed.
Timed– Output is activated for a field
selectable duration from 1 to 65,000 NOTE
seconds. For deluge and pre-action applications, the input
Continuous– Output latches until reset. voltage to the ARM or DCIO must be 21 VDC
Non-latching– Output follows the input. minimum with connection to any solenoid listed
in Table 2-6 or 2-7. Wiring must be in accordance
with the listed maximum wiring lengths.
Refer to the EQ25xxARM Specification Data sheet

(form number 90-1128) for additional information
Table 2-6—Solenoid Compatibility with Agent Release Module

for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications
FM Group Device
B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking HV-274-0601
Figure 2-15—Agent Release Module
Table 2-7—Maximum Wiring Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications
Solenoids Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)
FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 130 (40) 82 (25) 51 (16) 32 (10)
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 331 (101) 208 (63) 131 (40) 82 (25)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)
14.1 2-11 95-8533

EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)
The EQ25xxSAM Series Signal Audible Module (SAM) There are three IDC models available (see Figure 2-17):
(see Figure 2-16) provides two indicating circuits for
controlling UL Listed 24 vdc polarized audible/visual The EQ22xxIDC allows discrete inputs from smoke/
indicating appliances. heat detectors, manual call stations or other contact
devices.
The device is located on the LON and is controlled by
programmable logic in the Controller. The IDC accepts two dry contact inputs for use with
devices such as relays, pushbuttons, key switches,
Each output circuit is independently programmable to etc. The IDC supports ANSI/NFPA 72 Class B
allow notification of separate events. Each output can supervised input circuits
be individually activated for any one of the following
pre-defined outputs: Each circuit requires its own end of line (EOL) resistor
for monitoring circuit continuity. Nominal resistance of
1. Continuous the resistor is 10 k ohms.
2. 60 beats per minute
The EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating Device Circuit Ground
3. 120 beats per minute Fault Monitor (IDCGF) responds to the presence of a
ground fault within the power circuitry of the system.
4. Temporal pattern.
It provides an unsupervised dry contact input and
ground fault monitoring circuitry for indicating a power
Device outputs operate in the reverse polarity manner supply trouble condition. It is intended for use with a
when activated. Each output is rated at 2 amperes. third party power supply.
Auxiliary power input terminals are provided for
additional 24 vdc signaling power where required. The EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device Circuit Short
The output circuits are supervised for open and short Circuit (IDCSC) is similar to the IDC, but supports
circuit conditions. If a wiring fault occurs, a trouble supervision per EN 54 for European installations.
condition will be indicated at the Controller.
Refer to the EQ22xxIDC Specification Data sheet
Refer to the EQ25xxSAM Specification Data sheet (form number 90-1121) for additional information.
(form number 90-1129) for additional information
Figure 2-17—Initiating Device Circuit

Figure 2-16—Signal Audible Module
Note
Input types (e.g. fire alarm, trouble, and gas
alarms) are configurable through Det-Tronics
Safety System Software (S3).
14.1 2-12 95-8533

EQ22xxDCU and EQ22xxDCUEX PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse
Digital Communication Units
The Pointwatch Eclipse® Model PIRECL is a diffusion-
The EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication Unit (DCU) is based, point-type infrared gas detector that provides
an analog signal input device that accepts a 4 to 20 continuous monitoring of combustible hydrocarbon
milliampere signal. The device is typically connected gas concentrations in the range of 0 to 100% LFL.
to gas detectors, where the analog signal represents
the gas concentration. The LON supervision meets Signaling Line Circuit
(Class X) requirements per NFPA72: 2010 for the
Calibration of the DCU involves a non-intrusive Model PIRECL.
procedure that can be performed by one person at
the device without declassifying the area. For PIRECL installation, operation, maintenance,
specifications and ordering information, refer to form
The device supports two alarm setpoints that are number 95-8526.
defined as part of the device’s configuration setup. NOTE
When detecting combustible gases, the alarm The low alarm range for the EQP PIRECL is
setpoints represent low and high gas alarm levels. 5-40% LFL (the standard PIRECL is 5-60% LFL).
When detecting oxygen, the alarms represent the
range for the acceptable oxygen level. If oxygen For information regarding USCG Approval of the
drops below the alarm range, a low alarm is PIRECL Detector, refer to Appendix D.
generated by the device.
OPECL Open Path Eclipse
PointWatch/DuctWatch IR gas detector as well as
electrochemical sensors (hydrogen sulfide, carbon The Open Path Eclipse™ Model OPECL is an open
monoxide, chlorine, sulfur dioxide, and nitrogen path infrared gas detection system that provides
dioxide) are examples of devices that can be continuous monitoring of combustible hydrocarbon
connected to the DCU. gas concentrations in the range of 0 to 5 LFL-meters,
over a distance of 5 to 120 meters.
Note
A catalytic sensor can be connected to a DCU The LON supervision meets Signaling Line Circuit
through a transmitter, which converts the millivolt (Class X) requirements per NFPA72: 2010 for the
signal to a 4 to 20 milliampere signal. Model OPECL.
The EQ22xxDCUEX is a specialized version of the For OPECL installation, operation, maintenance,
DCU that contains a transmitter for connection to a specifications and ordering information, refer to form
Det-Tronics Model CGS catalytic combustible gas number 95-8556.
sensor.
UD10 DCU Emulator
Refer to the EQ22xxDCU Specification Data sheet
(form number 90-1118) for additional information. The FlexVu® Model UD10 DCU Emulator (UD10-DCU)
is designed for applications that require a gas detector
with digital readout of detected gas levels. Its LON
interface board makes the UD10-DCU compatible with
Eagle Quantum Premier systems by digitizing the 4-20
mA analog signal from the attached sensor/transmitter
and transmitting the value as a process variable over
the LON to the EQP controller. The UD10-DCU is
designed for use with most currently available
Det‑Tronics gas detectors.
For a list of compatible gas detectors, as well as

infor mation regarding installation, operation,
maintenance, specifications and ordering information,
refer to form number 95-8656.
14.1 2-13 95-8533

Section 3 CAUTION!
Installation Any deviat ion f rom t he manufactu re r ’s
recommended wiring practices can compromise
system operation and effectiveness. ALWAYS
NOTE
consult the factory if different wire types or
For specific information regarding systems
methods are being considered.
meeting EN54 standards, refer to the EQ5400
Series operation manual 95-8642.
Note
All field wiring must be marked per NFPA 70
Article 760.
SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS Note
Specific installation requirements may differ
Many factors need to be considered when
depending on local installation practices and
determining proper EQP System design. The
compliance with third party certifications. For
following paragraphs will discuss these factors and
local installation practices, consult the local
other issues useful in designing, installing and
authority having jurisdiction. For compliance
configuring the Eagle Quantum Premier System.
with third party certifications, consult the
appropriate appendix in this manual for
IDENTIFYING THE AREA OF PROTECTION additional installation requirements.
In order for the system to provide optimum coverage
and protection, it is critical to properly define the
Power Wiring
required “Area of Protection” (total area being
monitored by the system). The area of protection
should include all hazard sources requiring IMPORTANT!
monitoring, as well as suitable locations for mounting
For deluge and pre-action applications, input
detection, extinguishing, notification, and manual
voltage to the DCIO or ARM must be 21 vdc
devices. In order to accurately define the area of
minimum to ensure proper operation of the
protection and provide maximum protection, all
connected output device.
potential “Real” and “False” hazard sources must be
identified. The number and location of Real Hazards
determines the extent of the area of protection, and
impacts all subsequent design decisions. IMPORTANT
To ensure proper operation of field devices, the
voltage input to the device (measured at the
WARNING! device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the “Specifications” section of this
When drilling through surfaces in the process of
manual (18 Vdc minimum).
mounting equipment, verify that the location is
free of electrical wiring and electrical
components.
System Wiring (ATEX and IECEx)
For the interconnection of the modules within the EQP
system, use fixed installed wiring. (For correct wiring
IDENTIFYING WIRING, NETWORK (LON), AND
size and type for a specific device, refer to the
SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS
appropriate section in this manual.)
General Wiring Requirements
For ambient temperatures below –10°C and above
+60°C, use field wiring suitable for both minimum and
WARNING! maximum ambient temperatures.
DO NOT open any junction box or device
enclosure when power is applied without first
de-classifying the hazardous area.
14.1 3-1 95-8533

The EQP Ex n modules may only be installed, A power supply wiring diagram should contain
connected or removed when the area is known to be information describing wire distances and current
non-hazardous. The screw terminals are to be draws associated with all devices connected to the
tightened with a minimum torque of 0.5 Nm. wire segment. A typical power supply wiring
Equipotential bonding connection facilities on the recommendation is that the voltage drop from the
outside of electrical equipment shall provide effective power source to the end device should not exceed
connection of a conductor with a cross-sectional area ten percent. Using 24 vdc as a reference, the
of at least 4 mm2. maximum voltage drop should not exceed 2.4 vdc. A
wire gauge must be selected to ensure that the end
The Eagle Quantum Premier system utilizes a power device has at least 21.6 vdc or higher.
supply that provides an isolated 24 vdc battery
backed-up power to the fire protection devices as In order to calculate the power supply voltage for the
described in NFPA 72. More than one power supply end device, calculate the voltage drops that occur
may be used in a system to provide power to different due to each wire segment between the devices. This
sets of equipment as part of the system. involves determining the total current draw and the
two conductor wire resistance per each wire segment.
The power supply wiring may consist of one or more
daisy-chained wire segments providing power to the Example:
devices. For each of the daisy-chained wire Can 18 AWG wire be used to power three devices
segments, the installer must calculate the voltage from the 24 vdc power supply? Refer to the figure
drops that occur across the devices in order to below for wiring and device current draw information
determine the gauge of the wire that will be installed. along with voltage drop calculations.
Answer: If the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

requires a voltage loss of 10% or less, only 16 AWG
wire could be used, since the end device would
require 21.4 vdc. If there is no local requirement, then
18 AWG wire could be used to provide power to the
devices.
24 vdc Power 18 AWG Single Wire Resistance: R = 0.6385 Ohms per 100 ft
Supply 2 Conductor Resistance: CR = 2 • R
Total Current
695 mA Device 1
50 ft Device 1 Voltage = Supply Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
0.6385 Ohms = 24 – (I • CR)
65 mA
Current Draw = 24 – (0.695 • 0.6385)
= 23.55 vdc
Total Current
630 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 2
+
Device 3 Device 2
Device 2 Voltage = Device 1 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
65 mA = 23.55 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 23.55 – (0.630 • 1.9155)
= 22.35 vdc
Total Current
565 mA
150 ft =
1.9155 Ohms Device 3
Device 3
Device 3 Voltage = Device 2 Voltage – (Voltage Drop)
565 mA = 22.35 – (I • CR)
Current Draw = 22.35 – (0.565 • 1.9155)
= 21.27 vdc
14.1 3-2 95-8533

Determining Power Requirements
Tables 3-1 and 3-2 are provided for calculating the
total current requirements for those parts of the
system requiring battery backup.
Table 3–1—Standby Current Requirements at 24 vdc
Device Type Number of Devices Standby Current Total Current for Device Type
EQP Controller X 0.360 =
EQ3LTM Module X 0.001 =
EDIO Module X 0.075 =
DCIO Module X 0.075 =
Power Supply. Monitor X 0.060 =
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC X 0.055 =
X3301/X3301A - w/o heater X 0.160 =
X3301/X3301A - with heater X 0.565 =
X3302 - without heater X 0.160 =
X3302 - with heater X 0.565 =
X2200 X 0.135 =
DCUEX X 0.145 =
DCU with EC Sensor X 0.060 =
DCU with PointWatch X 0.300 =
DCU with DuctWatch X 0.300 =
Relay Module X 0.120 =
Analog Input Module X 0.160 =
Intelligent Protection Module X 0.075 =
EQ2220GFM X 0.018 =
PIRECL X 0.270 =
OPECL Transmitter X 0.220 =
OPECL Receiver X 0.220 =
ARM X 0.075 =
SAM X 0.060 =
Network Extender X 0.090 =
ASH Module X 0.560 =
EQ21xxPS Power Supply X 0.350 =
Other X =
Total Standby Current for System (in amperes) =
Note: Standby current is the average current draw for the device in normal mode.
This table is for battery calculations only.
14.1 3-3 95-8533

Table 3-2—Alarm Current Requirements at 24 Vdc
Device Type Number of Devices Alarm Current Total Current for Device Type
EQP Controller X 0.430 =
EQ3LTM Module X 0.001 =
EDIO 8 Inputs X 0.130 =
EDIO 8 Outputs X 0.075 =
DCIO 8 Inputs X 0.130 =
DCIO 8 Outputs X 0.075 =
Relay Module X 0.120 =
Power Supply Monitor X 0.060 =
IDC/IDCGF/IDCSC X 0.090 =
X3301/X3301A - w/o heater X 0.160 =
X3301/X3301A - with heater X 0.565 =
X2200 X 0.135 =
DCUEX X 0.160 =
DCU with EC Sensor X 0.075 =
DCU with PointWatch X 0.320 =
DCU with DuctWatch X 0.320 =
Analog Input Module X 0.300 =
Intelligent Protection Module X 0.150 =
EQ2220GFM X 0.018 =
PIRECL X 0.275 =
OPECL Transmitter X 0.220 =
OPECL Receiver X 0.220 =
ARM X 0.120 =
SAM X 0.120 =
Network Extender X 0.090 =
ASH Module X 0.560 =
EQ21xxPS Power Supply X 0.350 =
Other X =
Total Solenoid Load +
Total Signaling Load +
Total Alarm Current for System (in amperes) =
Note: This table is for battery calculations only.
14.1 3-4 95-8533

Table 3-3A—EQ21xxPS Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply
Characteristic
EQ2110PS/EQ2111PS EQ2130PS/EQ2131PS EQ2175PS/EQ2176PS
Input Voltage 120 vac 120/208/240 vac 120/208/240 vac
Input Current 4 Amps 11/6/6 Amps 24/15/12 Amps
Input Frequency 60 Hz – EQ2110PS 60 Hz – EQ2130PS 60 Hz – EQ2175PS
Input Frequency 50 Hz – EQ2111PS 50 Hz – EQ2131PS 50 Hz – EQ2176PS
Supply Rating 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps
Maximum Alarm Current 10 Amps 30 Amps 75 Amps
Maximum Standby Current 3.33 Amps 10 Amps 25 Amps
Recharge Current 6.67 Amps 20 Amps 50 Amps
Minimum Battery Capacity** 40 AmpHours 120 AmpHours 300 AmpHours
Maximum Battery Capacity 100 AmpHours 300 AmpHours 750 AmpHours
Maximum Deluge Standby Current* 1 Amp 3 Amps 7.5 Amps
*Only applies to 90 hour back-up applications.

**Use a battery with a maximum charge rate that exceeds 25% of the rating of the power supply.
EQ211xPS, EQ213xPS and EQ217xPS Power Supplies Battery Charger

Refer to Table 3-3A for Power Supply ratings. Use the following formula to calculate the minimum
battery charger size:
Backup Battery
Refer to Table 3-4 or 3-5 to calculate the minimum Minimum = Alarm Current + Total Amp Hours
size of the backup battery (in amp hours). Select a Charge Rate 48
sealed lead-acid battery with an adequate amp hour
rating.
CAUTION!
NOTE Care should be taken when considering the final
Connect two batteries in series for 24 volts. voltage at the device during AC power loss. With
Batteries must be protected from physical damage. loss of AC power, the device voltage will drop
The battery installation shall be adequately over time as the batteries lose their charge. If
ventilated. extended periods of AC power loss are to be
expected, either consider a heavier wire gauge
or specify batteries with higher amp-hour ratings.
14.1 3-5 95-8533

Table 3-4—Backup Battery Requirements for Automatic Release of Extinguishing Systems Except Deluge
Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours

X =
24 Hours
Alarm Current 5 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours

X =
0.083 Hours
Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =

Multiply by 1.2 (20% Safety Factor) X
T0014B
Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement
* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

IS 24 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 5 MINUTES ALARM TIME.
Table 3-5—Backup Battery Requirements for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications
Standby Current Standby Time* Standby Amp Hours

X =
90 Hours
Alarm Current 10 Minute Alarm Time* Alarm Amp Hours

X =
0.166 Hours
Sum of Standby and Alarm Amp Hours =

Multiply by 1.2 (20% Safety Factor) X
T0040B
Total Battery Amp Hour Requirement
* FM MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR DELUGE SYSTEMS IS

90 HOURS STANDBY TIME AND 10 MINUTES ALARM TIME.
EQP21X0PS(–X) Power Supplies Refer to Table 3-3B for power supply ratings.
The EQP2110PS(–P) and EQP2120PS(–B) Power
IMPORTANT
Supplies are used in pairs where the primary source of
The EQP21X0PS(–X) Power Supplies provide
input supply is connected to one and the secondary
EQP System devices with power from input
source is connected to the other. Each power supply may
supply 120 to 220 V ac. Use of this power supply
be backed up by another power supply of the same
does not provide the source of the secondary
model or by a DC-DC converter (see Figures 3-23A, B
supply such as secondary source batteries, their
and C for available configurations). A maximum of eight
supervision or charging, or UPS. Per NFPA
power supplies operated in parallel can be connected to
72-2010 requirements, such power supply
each input supply. Both the primary and secondary sets
related requirements must be separately
must be individually capable of operating the system
provided for and be accepted by the local
without the other supply. The secondary source is
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
required to be continuously powered.
The use of these supplies is based upon acceptance EQP2410PS(–P) Converter

of the local AHJ of the secure supply system that
The EQP2410PS(–P) Converter converts the DC input
provides the secondary supply. These supplies must
voltage to an adjustable, controlled and galvanically
be used in a redundant configuration, where one
separated 24 Vdc output voltage. The converter is
bank of supplies is fed from the primary source and
always connected to the secondary source.
the other bank from the secondary source. Both
primary and secondary supplies shall be continuously
available and both rated for a minimum 100% of load.
14.1 3-6 95-8533

Table 3-3B – EQP2XX0PS Power Supply and Converter Specifications
Device
Characteristic EQP2110PS(-P) EQP2120PS(-B) EQP2410PS(-P)
Power Supply Power Supply Converter
Input Frequency 60/50 60/50 N/A
Input Voltage 120/220 Vac 120/220 Vac 24 Vdc
Input Current, Max. 3.2 / 1.7 Iac 6.6 / 3.6 Iac 15.7 Idc
Output Voltage Range 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc 24.5 … 28.0 Vdc
Supply Rating 10 20 10
Maximum Alarm Current 10 20 10
Maximum Standby Current 10 20 10
91% for 120 Vac

Efficiency 88% 88%
93% for 220 Vac
Determining Power Requirements For Standby Current (amperes ac) requirements, use
Total Standby Current (amperes dc) for the system’s
Use of the EQP2110PS(–P) and EQP2120PS(–B)
applicable field devices from Table 3-1.
Power Supplies provides the primary and secondary
supplies.
For Alarm Current (amperes ac) requirements, use
Total Alarm current (amperes dc) for the system’s
The EQP2410PS(–P) Conver ter provides the
applicable field devices from Table 3-2.
secondary supply only. It is used in conjunction with
the EQP2110PS(–P) or EQP2120PS(–B) Power
note
Supplies, which serve as the primary supply (see
The suffix (-P) or (-B) defines the method for
Figures 3-23A, B and C for available configurations).
mounting the panel mount models:
The customer is responsible for providing adequate
(-P) = mounting plate
secondary power supply source needs. The ac input
(-B) = mounting brackets.
current requirements for EQP2XX0PS(–X) in relation to
EQP system dc current load (power supply output)
are calculated using the following formula:
Input Current = [Output Current x Output Voltage÷

Input Voltage ÷ Efficiency] + 0.43 A
Example:
[20 Adc x 28 Vdc ÷ 120 Vac ÷ 0.91] + 0.43 = 5.56 Aac
14.1 3-7 95-8533

Shield Grounding
caution!
Two shield ground terminals are provided inside the
junction box of each device, and also at the System ALWAYS discharge static charges from hands
Controller. Connect shield ends to the terminals before handling electronic devices or touching
provided (not to each other) inside the junction box. device terminals. Many devices contain
semiconductors that are susceptible to damage
CAUTION! by electrostatic discharge.
Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to the

device housing or to any other conductor. Refer Note
to Appendix E for EMC Directive requirements. For more information on proper handling, refer to
Det-Tronics Service Memo form 75-1005.
Junction Box Grounding

GROUND FAULT MONITOR (GFM)
All junction boxes must be electrically connected to INSTALLATION
earth ground.
Mounting
Response Time vs. System Size
The GFM is a DIN rail mountable device designed to be
When designing a system, it is important to realize mounted in the same enclosure as the EQP controller.
that by increasing the number of nodes (devices) on
the communication loop, the amount of time required
for a status change message from a detection device Wiring
to reach the System Controller also increases. 1. Connect power wiring from the EQP controller power
terminals 1 and 2 to the GFM terminals 1 and 2.
The System Controller requires a specific length of
time to process each bit of information that is 2. Connect power wiring from the GFM terminals 3 and
transferred along the communication loop. As the 4 to the EQP controller power terminals 3 and 4.
number of nodes increases, so does the amount of
data being processed as well as the time required for 3. Connect earth ground to terminal 5 or 10.
processing by the Controller.
4. Connect the relay contacts as required.
If the fastest possible communication response time is
an important criteria for a large system, it is Refer to Figure 3-1 for terminal block identification.
recommended that the number of nodes on an
individual loop be kept as small as possible. Consider
24 VDC
using multiple controllers with fewer nodes per loop. INPUT VOLTAGE
EARTH
Moisture Damage Protection + – + – GROUND
Moisture can adversely affect the performance of 1 2 3 4 5

electronic devices. It is important to take proper
+ – + –
precautions during system installation to ensure that
moisture will not come in contact with electrical
connections or components. RELAY
In applications where the network wiring is installed in

conduit, the use of watertight conduit seals, drains, SPARE
breathers, or equivalent is recommended to prevent 6 7 8 9 10

damage caused by condensation within the conduit.
COMMON NO NC N/C EARTH
GROUND
Electrostatic Discharge
NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN THE REST STATE,
An electrostatic charge can build up on the skin and NO POWER APPLIED. RELAY IS ENERGIZED WITH
POWER APPLIED AND NO GROUND FAULT
discharge when an object is touched. ALWAYS use (TERMINALS 6 & 7 CLOSE, TERMINALS 6 & 8 OPEN).
caution when handling devices, taking care not to
touch the terminals or electronic components. Figure 3-1—Terminal Configuration for Ground Fault Monitor
14.1 3-8 95-8533

NETWORK AND NETWORK Table 3-7—LON Maximum Cable Lengths
EXTENDER INSTALLATION
LON Cable Maximum Length**
(Manufacturer and Part No.)* Feet Meters
Mounting
Belden 3073F (Tray Rated) 6,500 2,000
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration
Det-Tronics NPLFP 6,500 2,000
free surface. (See the “Specifications” section in this
manual for device dimensions.) Technor BFOU 4,900 1,500
Rockbestos Gardex Fieldbus***
Wiring 1 Shielded Pair, 16 AWG,
Type TC, p/n FB02016-001 6,500 2,000
All devices on the LON are wired in a loop that starts
1 Shielded Pair, 18 AWG,
and ends at the System Controller. To ensure proper Type TC, p/n FB02018-001 6,500 2,000
operation, the LON should be wired using high speed
communication grade cable. Note: *Use the same type of cable in each wiring segment
between network extenders.
Note **Maximum wire lengths represent the linear wire distance of
Cable meeting the specifications listed in Table LON communications wiring between network extenders.
3-6 is suitable for distances up to 2000 meters. Be sure that selected cable meets all job specifications.
If necessary, consult factory for further suggested cable
types.
Any of the cable types listed in Table 3-7 can be used
***Cables designed to ISA SP50 Type A or IEC 61158-2
for wiring the LON for the distances indicated.
Type A are suitable for use in LON/SLC wiring. For armored
version, contact cable manufacturer.
Note
If no network extenders are used, the distances
listed are for the entire loop. If network extenders
are used, the distances listed are for the wiring
length between network extenders or between a
network extender and the System Controller.
Table 3-6—Typical Specification for 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) LON Wiring Cable per Echelon
Minimum Typical Maximum Units Condition
DC Resistance, each conductor 14 14.7 15.5 ohm/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566

DC Resistance Unbalanced 5% 20 C per ASTM D 4566
Mutual Capacitance 55.9 nF/km per ASTM D 4566
Characteristic Impedance 92 100 108 ohm 64 kHz to 1 MHz, per ASTM D 4566
Attenuation 20 kHz 1.3 dB/km 20 C per ASTM D 4566
64 kHz 1.9
78 kHz 2.2
156 kHz 3
256 kHz 4.8
512 kHz 8.1
772 kHz 11.3
1000 kHz 13.7
Propagation Delay 5.6 nsec/m 78 kHz
T0049B
Length:6,500 feet/2000
Length: 6,500 feet/2000 meters maximum
meters maximum (basic
(basic loop loop or between
or between NetworkNetwork Extenders).
Extenders).
Type:Single twisted
Type: Single twisted pair.
pair.
WireGauge:
Wire Gauge:16 16 AWG,
AWG, stranded
stranded (19(19 x 29),
x 29), tinned
tinned copper
copper withwith overall
overall shield.
shield.
Cablesmeeting
Cables meetingthese
thesespecifications
specificationsare
aregood
goodfor
forup
uptoto2000
2000meters.
meters.
14.1 3-9 95-8533

Table 3-8—Maximum Wiring Length from Nominal 24 vdc
Power Source to Network Extender (Maximum wire lengths are
IMPORTANT! based upon the cable’s physical and electrical characteristics.)
Det-Tronics recommends the use of shielded
Maximum Wiring Distance
cable (required by ATEX) to prevent external Wire Size
Feet Meters
electromagnetic interference from affecting field
devices. 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 2200 650
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 3500 750
14 AWG (2.5 mm2)* 5600 1700
IMPORTANT!
* Approximate Metric Equivalent.
Be sure that the selected cable meets the
specifications. The use of other cable types can
degrade system operation. If necessary, consult
factory for further suggested cable types.
3. Connect shields to the designated "shield"
1. Remove the cover from the Network Extender terminals. The two shield terminals are connected
enclosure. internally to ensure shield continuity.
2. Connect 24 vdc power lead wires and CAUTION!
communication network cable to the terminal
block. (See Figure 3-2 for terminal location and Do not ground either shield at the network
Figure 3-3 for terminal identification). extender enclosure. Insulate the shields to
prevent shorting to the device housing or to any
See Table 3-8 to determine maximum wiring other conductor.
length.
4. Check ALL wiring to ensure that proper
COM 1 - Communication network connections: connections have been made.
Connect to COM 2 terminals of the next
device on the loop, A to A and B to B. 5. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
in good condition.
COM 2 - Communication network connections:
Connect to COM 1 terminals of the 6. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
previous device on the loop, A to A and junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
B to B. ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.
24 VDC - Connect the "+" terminal to the positive
side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both Note
"+" terminals are connected internally.) The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease, available from Det-Tronics.
Connect the "–" terminal to the negative
side of the 24 vdc power source. (Both 7. Place the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only
"–" terminals are connected internally.) until snug. Do not over tighten.
TERMINAL NO. 1
1 12
A2021
Figure 3-2—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Location
14.1 3-10 95-8533

1 SHIELD
2 A COM 1
GND
3 B
11
12
4 SHIELD
13
10
14
9
8
+
7
5
6
5
4
–
3
6
2
1
24 VDC
7 –
8 +
9 SHIELD
A1870
10 A Figure 3-4—IDC Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port

Junction Box
11 B COM 2
Wiring
12 SHIELD
A1947 1. Remove the cover from the device junction box.
2. Connect external system wiring to the appropriate

terminals on the terminal block. (See Figure 3-4
Figure 3-3—Network Extender Wiring Terminal Identification
for terminal block location and Figure 3-5 for
terminal identification). The input to the IDC
consists of one or more normally open switches
(momentary pushbuttons are not recommended),
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) with a 10K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in parallel
INSTALLATION across the furthest switch from the input.
IMPORTANT!
EQ22xxIDC Series Initiating Device Circuit
(IDC) An EOL resistor must be installed on both IDC
inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
impedance must not exceed 500 ohms.
The following paragraphs describe how to properly
install the EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections have
been properly made.
Mounting
IMPORTANT!
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for Be sure that the keyed ribbon cable is properly
device dimensions.) connected to the terminal board.
warning! 4. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is

in good condition.
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
to removing a junction box cover with power
5. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the
applied.
junction box cover with a thin coat of grease to
ease installation and ensure a watertight
enclosure.
14.1 3-11 95-8533

Note Mounting
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease, available from Det-Tronics.
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for
device dimensions.)
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Device Network Addresses” in this section.) Wiring
7. Place the cover on the junction box and tighten

WARNING!
only until snug. DO NOT over tighten.
The enclosure must be electrically connected to
earth ground.
IDC MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
1. Remove the enclosure cover from the device.
+ 1
CIRCUIT 1 EOL (10K)

2. Remove the communication module from the
– 2
junction box. Connect external wiring to the
appropriate points on the device terminal block.
+ 3
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
CIRCUIT 2 EOL (10K)
Figure 3-6 for terminal identification)
– 4
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections

A 5
have been properly made.
COM 2
B 6
4. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
–
7 14
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
COM SHIELD
installation and future removal of the cover.
8 13 –
24 VDC
Note
A 12 +
9
The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
COM 1
grease available from Detector Electronics.
B 10 11 +
A1871
RELAY CONTACT
Figure 3-5—Terminal Configuration for IDC FOR MONITORING BATTERY.
CONTACT OPENS
WITH BATTERY TROUBLE CONDITION.
+ 3
68K OHM
INPUT RESISTOR
– 4
EQ22xxIDCGF series initiating device
circuit ground fault A 5
RELAY CONTACT
FOR MONITORING AC POWER.
CONTACT CLOSES
COM 2
The following paragraphs describe how to properly B
ON LOSS OF AC POWER.
6
install and configure the EQ22xxIDCGF Initiating
Device Circuit Ground Fault. 7 14 –
COM SHIELD
8 13 –
24 VDC
A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +
B1922
NOTE: ENCLOSURE AND/OR MOUNTING BRACKET

MUST BE CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.
Figure 3-6—Terminal Configuration for IDCGF
14.1 3-12 95-8533

Wiring
WARNING!
If the installation uses catalytic type combustible caution!
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
containing silicone not be used, since they will The enclosure should be electrically connected
cause irreversible damage to the sensor. to earth ground.
5. Install the communication module in the device 1. Remove the cover from the device enclosure.
enclosure.
2. Remove the communication module from the
Note junction box. Connect external wiring to the
Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected. appropriate terminals on device terminal block.
(See Figure 3-4 for terminal block location and
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting Figure 3-7 for terminal identification.) The input to
Device Network Addresses” in this section) the IDCSC consists of a normally open switch with
a 3.3k ohm series resistor, and a 10K ohm, 1/4
When configuring the EQ22xxIDCGF, its “device watt EOL resistor in parallel across the switch.
type” should be configured as an initiating device
circuit (IDC). Note
An EOL resistor must be installed on both IDCSC
Both inputs must be configured for a trouble inputs (including unused inputs). Wiring
condition. impedance must not exceed 500 ohms. A 3.3K
ohm resistor must be installed in series with the
Circuit 1 – “Open” indicates a –24 VDC ground switch. For correct operation, only one switch
fault condition. “Active” indicates a +24 per input can be connected.
VDC ground fault condition.
3. Check wiring to ensure that ALL connections have
Circuit 2 – “Active” indicates a loss of AC input been properly made.
power.
“Open” indicates a loss of battery 4. Install the communication module in the device
power. enclosure.
7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until 5. Inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is in
snug. DO NOT over tighten. good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the enclosure cover to ease both
installation and future removal of the cover.
EQ22xxIDCSC series initiating Device
Circuit Short Circuit Note
(Not FM Approved) The recommended lubricant is a silicone free
grease available from Detector Electronics.
The following paragraphs describe how to properly Note

install and configure the EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Be sure the ribbon cable is properly connected.
Device Circuit Short Circuit.
6. Set the node address for the device. (See “Setting
Mounting Device Network Addresses” in this section.)
The device should be securely mounted to a vibration 7. Place the cover on the enclosure and tighten until
free surface. (See “Specifications” in this manual for snug. Do not over tighten.
device dimensions.
14.1 3-13 95-8533

MANUAL PULL STATION
OR OTHER CONTACT DEVICE
Note
IDCSC For any selected enclosure, the enclosure must
conform to all applicable regulations and
+ 1
EOL (10K)
requirements.
CIRCUIT 1
– 3.3 K
2
NOTE
The Trouble signal must be located in an area
+ 3
EOL (10K)
where it is likely to be heard.
CIRCUIT 2
– 3.3 K
4
Classified locations require the appropriate hazardous
rated enclosure. It is recommended that operators/
A 5
switches be installed in the enclosure. This avoids
COM 2
the need to declassify the area in order to operate the
B 6
Controller. Regulations require that key switches be
installed for certain operations. An appropriate
7 14 –
window should be part of the enclosure in order to
COM SHIELDS
allow an operator to view the text display and LED
8 13 –
indicators.
24 VDC
A 9 12 +
Note
COM 1
If an enclosure does not have a keyed entry, a
B 10 11 +
C2076
special tool is required to gain entry into an
enclosure.
Figure 3-7—IDCSC Terminal Identification
Det-Tronics offers several approved (FM/CSA/ATEX/
CE) hazardous area enclosures that have Eagle
EQ3XXX CONTROLLER Quantum Premier equipment installed in the
INSTALLATION enclosure. Contact Det-Tronics for further information.

MOUNTING
install and configure the EQ3XXX Controller.
The Controller is designed for direct panel mounting
or DIN rail (optional) mounting. See “Specifications”
ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
section of this manual for mounting dimensions.
The Controller must be properly installed in a suitable
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure Note
must provide space to install and wire the Controller Clips for DIN rail mounting are available, but
and must also provide for ground wire termination. must be specified at the time of ordering.
The enclosure must contain either a keyed lock or a
special tool to gain access into the enclosure. The Note
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range A minimum clearance of 4 inches between the
of the location plus the temperature rise of all Controller and nearby equipment is required to
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The provide room for wiring and ventilation.
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that
is going to be installed.
NOTE SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD

The Controller and enclosure must be
An optional Serial Interface Board is available for the
connected to earth ground.
EQP Controller. See Figures 3-8 and 3-9 for details on
the electrical connections.
For ordinary locations when entry is required to
operate the equipment, the cabinet should be a
dead-front construction and 16-gauge cold-rolled
steel. The door lock system shall accept different
keys for entry. An Authorized Persons key and a
Person-in-charge key will allow entry into the cabinet.
The cabinet should contain a window to view the
Controller’s text display and LED indicators.
14.1 3-14 95-8533

WIRING Electrical Connections
Figure 3-8 shows the location of wiring connectors on
Power Wiring
the Controller module. Figure 3-9 identifies individual
terminals.
caution!
Input voltage at the Controller must be 18 vdc Connector P1, Terminals 1 to 4 —
minimum to ensure proper operation. 24 vdc Input Power
Connect the power supply to terminals 1 and 2 of the
It is important to consider both the wire gauge and the Controller. Terminals 3 and 4 must also be connected
distance from the Controller to the power supply. As to power.
the distance between the Controller and the power
supply increases, so must the diameter of the power When controller and power supplies are installed in
wiring in order to maintain a minimum of 18 vdc at the separate NRTL cabinets, two power cables from two
Controller. distribution circuits are required, so that if one is lost,
the controller will continue to operate and signal a
trouble condition. The power circuit must be
IMPORTANT! protected against physical damage.
To ensure proper operation of devices, the
Shields on power cables must be connected to
voltage input to the device (measured at the
chassis ground (earth).
device) must be within the range indicated for
that device in the "Specifications" section of this
manual.
P12: TERMINALS 66 TO 68 – PORT 4
RS-232 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
P11: TERMINALS 63 TO 65 – PORT 3

P13: HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL) RS-232 MODBUS RTU MASTER/SLAVE
RS-232 (REDUNDANCY ONLY) OR S3 CONFIGURATION
P10: TERMINALS 60 TO 62 - PORT 2

68 66 65 63 62 60
SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD

(OPTIONAL)
DET-TRONICS
CONTROLNET ®
59
BNC CONNECTOR B P9: TERMINALS 57 TO 59

56 57
RS-232 S3 CONFIGURATION PORT

P8: TERMINALS 54 TO 56 - PORT 1
CONTROLNET
54

BNC CONNECTOR A
53
P7: TERMINALS 48 TO 53
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence LON CONNECTIONS
48
E2105
1 4 5 12 13 20 21 32 33 44 45 47
FAULT RELAY (NC CONTACT)
RELAYS 5 TO 8
RELAYS 1 TO 4
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4
24 VDC INPUT POWER
Figure 3-8—Location of Wiring Terminals on EQP Controller
14.1 3-15 95-8533

+ 1 48 SHIELD P2
P1
– 2 COM 1 49 1B
24 VDC INPUT POWER + 3 50 1A INPUT, + 5
P7
– 4 51 SHIELD LON
1+ 5 COM 2 52 2B
RESET*
1– 6 53 2A
COMMON, – 6
2+ 7 54 GND
ACKNOWLEDGE* P8
P2
2– 8 55 B RS-485
PORT 1
DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TO 4 3+ 9 56 A A2117
SILENCE*
3– 10 57 GND
P9
4+ 11 58 RxD RS-232 Figure 3-10—Unsupervised Input Wiring
INHIBIT ENABLE** CONFIG
4– 12 59 TxD PORT
5+ 13
ENTER*
5– 14
6+ 15
CANCEL* P4
P3
6– 16
DIGITAL INPUTS 5 TO 8 17
7+ 60 A
COMMON 21 +
NEXT* P10
7– 18 61 B RS-485
PORT 2
8+ 19 62 GND
PREVIOUS*
20 N. O. 22
8– 63 TxD
P11
1 C 21 64 RxD RS-232
PORT 3
1 NO 22 FIRE ALARM* 65 GND
N. C. 23
1 NC 23 66 TxD
P12
2 C 24 67 RxD RS-232 A2118
PORT 4
2 NO 25 SUPERVISORY* 68 GND –
P4
2 NC 26
RELAYS 1 TO 4 3 C 27
Figure 3-11—Unsupervised Relay Output
3 NO 28 LOW GAS ALARM*
P13
3 NC 29 RS-232 - HSSL
4 C 30 (Custom Connector,
for Redundancy Only)
4 NO 31 HIGH GAS ALARM*
4 NC 32
5 C 33
5 NO 34 INHIBIT*
5 NC 35
6 C 36
6 NO 37 OUTPUT INHIBIT*
P5
6 NC 38
RELAYS 5 TO 8 7 C 39
7 NO 40 LON FAULT*
7 NC 41
8 C 42
8 NO 43 BEEPER*
8 NC 44
C 45
* DIGITAL INPUTS AND RELAY OUTPUTS CAN BE
P6
NO 46 CONFIGURED AS THE STATIC FUNCTION NAME (AS
TROUBLE RELAY SHOWN) OR CAN BE USER DEFINED.
NC 47 ** INHIBIT ENABLE FOR SIL CONTROLLERS ONLY.
G2104
Figure 3-9—EQP Controller Terminal Identification
14.1 3-16 95-8533

Connector P2, Terminals 5 to12 — NOTE
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 1 to 4 Refer to Figure 3-12 for location of termination
jumpers.
Connector P3, Terminals 13 to 20 —
Unsupervised Digital Input Channels 5 to 8
Jumper P25 – LON COM 1 Termination
See Figure 3-10 for example. Only channel 1 is shown
in Figure 3-10. The information is typical for channels 1-2 COM 1 Terminated (factory setting)
2-8. 2-3 COM 1 Unterminated (Redundancy)
Connector P4, Terminals 21 to 32 — Jumper P26 – LON COM 2 Termination

Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 1 to 4
1-2 COM 2 Terminated (factory setting)
Connector P5, Terminals 33 to 44 — 2-3 COM 2 Unterminated (Redundancy)
Unsupervised Relay Output Channels 5 to 8
See Figure 3-11 for example. Only channel 1 is shown Connector P8, Terminals 54, 55 & 56 , Port 1—
in Figure 3-11. The information is typical for channels RS-485 Modbus RTU Master/Slave
2-8.
Configuration data downloaded into the controller
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
Note
parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device
Channel software configurations include all
address. Software selectable baud rates are 2400,
panel indicator functions to automatically mimic
4800, 9600,19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200.
the controller front panel indicators.
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even.
The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Connector P6, Terminals 45, 46 & 47 —
Port Pinout (3-position terminal block)
Trouble Relay
54 — GND
The Trouble relay is not configurable. In the normal
55 — B
condition, the relay coil is energized, closing the N.O.
56 — A
contact (terminals 45-46) and opening the N.C.
contact (terminals 45-47). The relay coil is
de-energized in the trouble condition. Jumper P27 – RS-485 Termination Jumper
1-2 Unterminated
Connector P7, Terminals 48 to 53 — 2-3 Terminated 121 ohms (factory setting)
LON Signaling Line Circuit Terminals Transceiver input impedance: 68 kohm
The LON loop is wired so that the controller’s LON
COM 1 is connected to the field device’s COM 2 Connector P9, Terminals 57, 58 & 59 —
connection. The field device’s COM 1 is wired to the S3 Configuration Port
next device’s COM 2 connection. This continues
through the last field device on the loop. The last field
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate
device’s COM 1 is then wired back to the Controller’s
and parity check for the serial port. Software
COM 2 connection. LON A and B polarities must be
selectable baud rates are 2400, 4800, 9600,19200,
maintained throughout the loop (i.e., always wire A to
38400, 57600, and 115200 (factory default is 115200).
A and B to B between the devices).
Port Pinout (6-position connection terminal block)
48 — COM 1 shield connection
57 — GND
49 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
58 — RXD
50 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
59 — TXD
51 — COM 2 shield connection
53 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2 Connector P10, Terminals 60, 61 & 62, Port 2–
RS-485 Modbus RTU Master/Slave
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
parity check for the serial port, and Modbus device
14.1 3-17 95-8533

68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
P12 P11 P10

PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2
3 3
P29 P28
1 1
RS-232 Transmit LED (Amber)
RS-232 Receive LED (Green)
P29: RS-485 Ground Fault

MonitorJumper
RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber)

RS-232 Transmit LED
(Amber)
P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper

1 P
DET-TRONICS
O
®
RS-485 Transmit LED (Amber) P27 R
3 T
1
A B Safety System Controller
Channel RS-485 Termination Jumper
Indicators Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power
LON COM 2
RS-485 Receive LED (Green) P26 Termination Jumper
1 3
1 3
P25
LON COM 1
Termination Jumper
Figure 3-12—Location of Termination Jumpers, Communication Indicator LEDs and Communication Ports
address. Software selectable baud rates are Jumper P28 – RS-485 Termination Jumper
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 and 230400.
1-2 Terminated 121 ohms (factory setting)
2-3 Unterminated
Transceiver input impedance: 68 kohm
Jumper P29 – RS-485 Ground Fault Monitor
60 — A
61 — B 1-2 Enabled
62 — GND 2-3 Disabled (factory setting)
14.1 3-18 95-8533

TO
ADDITIONAL
CONTROLLER(S)
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
GND B A GND B A
P12 P11 P10 P12 P11 P10

PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2 PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2
3 3 3 3
P29 P28 P29 P28

1 1 1 1
P29: RS-485 Ground Fault P29: RS-485 Ground Fault

Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2 Monitor Jumper, Position 1 & 2
P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper, P28: RS-485 Termination Jumper,

Position 1 & 2 Position 1 & 2
DET-TRONICS DET-TRONICS
® ®
56 56
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
55 55
A B Safety System Controller 54 A B Safety System Controller 54
Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power Eagle Quantum Premier Fire Alarm Trouble Inhibit Power
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr
Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence
D2276
Figure 3-13—Controller to Controller Communication with Class A Signaling Line Circuit Classification per NFPA 72
Use Port 2 to pass safety critical information between • The Ground Fault Monitor jumper P29 must be set to
controllers. User logic can pass all alarm, trouble, Enabled (position 1-2) on all controllers.
and supervisory information between the controllers.
• For Class X, Connect terminals A (# 56) and B (# 55)
Watchdog timers must be implemented in user logic
between the controllers. Connect terminal A (# 60) and
to verify the integrity of the SLC. Consult the local
B (# 61) between controllers using a different cable route.
authority having jurisdiction for annunciation
Connect GND (# 54) to GND (# 62) on each controller.
requirements.
• For Class B, connect terminals A (terminal number
60) and B (terminal number 61) between the
CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION
controllers. The GND (terminal number 62) must not
be connected.
Controller to Controller Communication (SLC485)
with Signaling Line Circuit Classification
See Figure 3-13 for wiring details.
Class B or X, per NFPA 72
To connect up to twelve controllers together and be Note 1: 56.7 kbps minimum and 115.2 kbps maximum
able to transfer safety information between the baud rate required for proper communication.
controllers, the communication link must be classified Note 2: Consult the factory for configuration set-up.
as a signaling line circuit per NFPA 72. With the serial Note 3: Maximum SLC485 length over copper not to
board option, Port 2 (plug 10) is a RS-485 serial exceed 1000 meters.
connection that is ground fault monitored.
Controller to Controller with Fiber Optic Link, Signal
To meet the signaling line circuit (Class B or Class X)
Line Circuit Classification Class B or X per NFPA 72.
requirements, the following must be configured for
correct operation: Up to twelve EQP controllers (single or redundant
pair) can be inter-connected via a fiber optic link. This
• All controllers must have the optional serial board.
communication link is classified as a signaling line
• The Termination jumper P28 must be set to circuit per NFPA 72 to allow safety information to be
Terminate (position 1-2) on all controllers. transferred between controllers.
14.1 3-19 95-8533

Table 3-9—Approved Supported Media Converters for Fiber Optic Link The maximum distance of a particular optic link given
Manufacturer Model Number Description the optical budget is calculated as:
Moxa RS-485 to Single-mode Fiber Length = [Optical budget] – [Link Loss]
TCF-142-S
(www.moxa.com) Fiber Optical Converter [Fiber Loss / km]
PSI-MOS- RS-485 to Multi-mode
Phoenix Contact where link loss includes number of end connectors,
RS485W2/FO Fiber Optical Converter
splices and safety margin.
Example: 10 db link budget
The fiber optic link incorporates media converters to Cable Attenuation: 0.4 db / km
convert from copper to fiber optic cable. The converter 2 connectors: (1 each end) with 0.5 db ea.
must be located in the same cabinet as the controller Safety margin: 3.0 db max
and cannot use ground fault monitoring. The approved Max. Distance = 10 – (2 x 0.5) – 3.0 = 15 km
supported converters are shown in Table 3-9. The link
budget for the listed fiber optic converters is 10dB. 0.4
For more information regarding selection and

Warning installation of fiber optic media, please contact
The fiber converters must be mounted inside the Det-Tronics customer service.
same enclosure as the controllers to conform to NFPA
72.
Connector P11, Terminals 63, 64 & 65, Port 3–
RS-232 Modbus RTU Master/Slave
The media converter can be connected to either of the or S3 Configuration Port (Non-Isolated)
EQP controller RS-485 communication ports (Port 1 or
Port 2). Figure 3-14 illustrates a typical Class B wiring Configuration data downloaded into the controller
connection (single mode) between two EQP controllers configures the serial interface transmission baud rate,
in a redundant configuration using Port 1. Note: If Port 2 parity check and MODBUS device address for the
is preferred, the optional serial board must be serial port. Software selectable baud rates are
purchased. 9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400.
Figure 3-15 shows a typical Class X wiring connection The controller uses 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
(single mode).
Figure 3-16 shows a typical Class X wiring connection 63 — TXD
for Phoenix (multi mode). 64 — RXD
65 — GND
EQP CONTROLLER No. 1 EQP CONTROLLER No. 3

SINGLE MODE
56 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 56

A A
PORT 1 PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 54 Rx Tx Rx Tx 54 GND
T+ T+
T– T–
R+D+ R+D+
Moxa Moxa
R–D– R–D–
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
Tx Tx
Rx Rx
EQP CONTROLLER No. 2 GND GND EQP CONTROLLER No. 4
A 56 56 A
PORT 1 PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 54 54 GND
B2328
Figure 3-14—Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class B
14.1 3-20 95-8533

SINGLE MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Rx Tx Rx Tx
T+ T+
T– T–
R+D+ Moxa Moxa R+D+ EQP CONTROLLER No. 2

EQP CONTROLLER No. 1
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
R–D– R–D–
A 60 Tx Tx 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
B 61 Rx Rx 61 B
RS-485 RS-485
GND 62 GND GND 62 GND
SINGLE MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Rx Tx Rx Tx
A 56 56 A
PORT 1 T+ T+ PORT 1
B 55 55 B
RS-485 RS-485
T– T–
GND 54 54 GND
R+D+ Moxa Moxa R+D+
TCF-142-S TCF-142-S
R–D– R–D– B2371
Tx Tx
Rx Rx
GND GND
Figure 3-15—Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class X
EQP CONTROLLER No. 1 TROUBLE INPUT TROUBLE INPUT EQP CONTROLLER No. 3
TO EQP SYSTEM TO EQP SYSTEM
MULTI MODE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A 60 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
RS-485 B 61 61 B RS-485
GND 62 ATD ARD BTD BRD BTD BRD ATD ARD 62 GND
D(P) D(P)
Phoenix Phoenix
D(N) PSI-MOS- PSI-MOS-
D(N)
RS485W2/FO RS485W2/FO
EQP CONTROLLER No. 2 GND GND EQP CONTROLLER No. 4
A 60 60 A
PORT 2 PORT 2
RS-485 B 61 61 B RS-485
GND 62 62 GND
B2372
Figure 3-16—Controller to Controller NFPA 72 Approved Fiber Optic Link, Class X
14.1 3-21 95-8533

Connector P12, Terminals 66, 67 & 68, Port 4– EQP
LON
TERMINATION
RS-232 Modbus RTU Master/Slave (Non-Isolated) CONTROLLER MODULE
Configuration data downloaded into the controller A 53 3 A 6

COM 2 TO
configures the serial interface transmission baud rate, COM 2 B 52 2 B 5 FIELD
DEVICES
parity check and MODBUS device address for the S 51 1 S 4
serial port. Software selectable baud rates are
9600,19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, and 230400. A 50
Software selectable parity is None, Odd, and Even. COM 1 B 49
S 48

66 — TXD
67 — RXD
68 — GND
EQP
Connector P13 — CONTROLLER
RS-232 High Speed Serial Port
A 53
This port is dedicated to inter-controller connection COM 2 B 52

LON
required for redundancy, and is not available for any TERMINATION
S 51
other use. This port is automatically configured. MODULE
A 50 3 A 6
COM 1 TO
CONFIGURATION COM 1 B 49 2 B 5 FIELD
DEVICES
Software Defined Addresses S 48 1 S 4

C2274
Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3) is NOTE: LON TERMINATION JUMPERS P25 AND P26 (SEE FIGURE 3-12)
programmed with the addresses that are assigned to MUST BE IN POSITION 2 AND 3 FOR REDUNDANT CONFIGURATION
(ON BOTH CONTROLLERS).
the controller when the configuration file is
downloaded into the controller. Addresses define and Figure 3-17— LON Connection for Redundant EQP Controllers
configure the Controller’s LON address, Modbus slave
address, and the ControlNet option board address.
Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique WIRING
tag number. This tag number must include zone The redundant controllers are wired the same as a
designation, which will be shown on the Controller's simplex controller except for the LON wiring and the
display when the device is in alarm. dedicated high-speed serial link, which are defined
below. Refer to EQ3XXX Controller Installation for
general installation details.
EQ3XXX REDUNDANT CONTROLLER
INSTALLATION
LON WIRING
The redundant controllers must be purchased with the The LON must be connected to both redundant
following options for correct installation: controllers to ensure correct operation. Two LON
• Serial board Termination Modules are required for the installation
• High-speed serial cable as shown in Figure 3-17.
• LON termination modules (2).
HIGH SPEED SERIAL LINK (HSSL)
ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS
The redundant controllers are connected together by
The redundant controllers must be located next to a dedicated high-speed serial link. This link is a pre-
each other in the same enclosure (4 ft. interconnecting fabricated cable that has a custom connector for ease
cable). of use. Redundant controllers are automatically
addressed with the HSSL cable. One end of the
cable is labeled Primary. The primary controller takes
MOUNTING
address 1, while the secondary controller is address
The controllers are designed for direct panel mounting 2. The significance this has for the user is that the
or DIN rail mounting. See “Specifications” section of primary is the default master when both controllers
this manual for mounting dimensions. are powered-up at the same time.
14.1 3-22 95-8533
CONFIGURATION
IMPORTANT!
S3 Configuration Power supplies require unrestricted air flow for
The S3 configuration software is used to configure the proper cooling.
redundant controllers. A check box on the controller
configuration screen must be enabled and MOUNTING
downloaded to the controllers.
Mount the power supply monitor in a Nationally
IMPORTANT Recognized Test Laborator y (NRTL) labeled
enclosure. Refer to the “Specifications” section for
If the controllers have not been configured for mounting dimensions.
redundancy via the S3 configuration software,
redundancy will not function.
WIRING
Controller Addresses
caution!
The LON addresses are pre-determined and cannot
be adjusted. Address 1 and 2 have been reserved for The power supply should be properly connected
a redundant controller configuration. to an earth ground! A ground wire MUST be
connected to the power supply units’s case
ground!
Modbus NOTE
Modbus ports on each controller share the serial The Power Supply Monitor uses two of the four
settings including baud rate and address. Controllers DIP switches to select an appropriate fault level
in standby mode don’t respond to or issue Modbus for the installation. See Figure 3-18. The unit will
messages. This allows for transparent switching on a fault when the batteries source a current level
multi-drop network. If RS-232 is used, a relay higher than the threshold for 20 seconds. The
switching mechanism can be used. fault will clear when the current drops to half the
level for 20 seconds. The current level selection
is based on the minimum current draw of the
ControlNet attached equipment. The selected value must be
The ControlNet interface on each controller will have less than the actual minimum current draw for
different addresses. This allows both controllers to the system.
reside on the same ControlNet network at the same
1. Verify that the input source is the same voltage
time. The primary controller uses the configured
and frequency as that marked on the nameplate
address while the standby assumes an address 1
of the power supply.
higher than the primary controller. Application logic in
the attached PLC must be used to determine which
2. Verify that transformer taps are set for the correct
controller has the correct output information.
a.c. input. (Input tap setting is located inside the
Information coming from the PLC should be written to
power supply enclosure.)
both Premier Controllers.
3. Verify that the supply power wire size and fusing
are adequate for the current indicated on the
EQ21XXPS SERIES POWER SUPPLY power supply nameplate.
AND POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
INSTALLATION Note
Consult the power supply manufacturer’s instruction
manual provided with the support documentation
WARNING!
received with the Eagle Quantum System.
ALWAYS follow all safety notes and instructions
when installing power supply or batteries! Note
Required Overload Current is usually equal to
WARNING! 15% of the nominal rating.
Make sure a.c. power is OFF at main a.c.
breaker before beginning power supply
installation!
14.1 3-23 95-8533

J1: POWER AND LON WIRING LON ADDRESS SWITCHES J3: AC INPUT
1 TERMINAL NO. 1
TERMINAL J2-1 TO
TERMINAL B
TERMINAL J2-2 TO SWITCH NO. 1

TERMINAL C
+ –
J2 4 3 2 1
1
YELLOW LED
TERMINAL NO. 1 RED LED
GREEN LED
C1949
0.0005 OHM SHUNT
J2: BATTERY TEST POINTS TERMINAL NO. 1 ALARM CURRENT LEVEL SWITCH SETTINGS
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR TERMINAL "C" ALARM LEVEL 1 2 3 4

PC BOARD ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL "B" 200 mA O O – –
400 mA X O – –
NOTE: J2 TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ARE CONNECTED TO J1 TERMINALS 7 AND 8 INTERNALLY 800 mA O X – –

X = CLOSED
ON THE PC BOARD. J1 TERMINALS 7 AND 8 ARE ALSO CONNECTED TO THE 2 AMP X X – – O = OPEN
BATTERY CIRCUIT BREAKER VIA POWER DIST CKT.
Figure 3-18—Power Supply Monitor Terminal and Switch Location
4. Connect external wiring to the appropriate points

on Power Supply. Refer to Figure 3-18 for terminal
1 SHIELD
block locations and Figures 3-19 and 3-20 for
terminal identification. Connect the 24 vdc power
2 A COM 1 wires and the LON network cable to the appropriate
points on J1. (Redundant “+”, “–” and shield
3 B
terminals are connected internally.) Do not ground
any shield at the monitor / power distribution
4 SHIELD
cabinet. Insulate the shields to prevent shorting to
the device housing or to any other conductor.
5 +
5. Connect a two wire cable between the AC input of

6 – the power supply and terminals 1 and 4 on J3, the
24 VDC
AC input terminal block on the power supply
7 – monitor. See Figure 3-20.
8 +
9 SHIELD 1 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC
10 A 2 NOT USED
11 B COM 2 3 NOT USED
12 SHIELD 4 AC INPUT 120 / 240 VAC

A1947
A1950
Figure 3-19—J1: Power and LON Wiring Terminal Figure 3-20—J3: AC Input Terminal
14.1 3-24 95-8533

POWER SUPPLY MONITOR 12
TERMINAL J1
See Note 10 11
10
1 9
AC MONITOR 8
4 7
See Note 4
6
5
4
C 3
2
B 1
AC POWER H – –
24 VDC
See Notes 1 & 3 N OUTPUT
G + + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –
+ POWER DIST CKT #2 –
AC BREAKER DC BREAKER + POWER DIST CKT #4 –

BATTERY
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLY See Note 3

(See Note 9)
NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET
NOTES
1. AC INPUT SELECTABLE (THROUGH THE OIS) FOR 120 / 208 / 240 VAC.
2. BATTERY SIZE CALCULATED BASED ON SYSTEM LOAD.
See Note 6 See Note 2 3. CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL PROTECT AGAINST EXCESSIVE CURRENT LOAD.
4. REMOVAL OF TERMINAL PLUG WITH POWER APPLIED TO TERMINALS B AND C
– + – + WILL DAMAGE POWER SUPPLY MONITOR.
5. NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET IS KEY LOCKED ENCLOSURE.
12 VDC 12 VDC 6. DASH LINES DENOTE PROTECTION AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE.
7. ANY PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY UNITS MAY BE INSTALLED
EXTERNALLY TO THE NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET, PROVIDED THEY ARE
PROTECTED AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE. ALL DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUITS
E1951 BACKUP BATTERIES AND CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
AND THE NTRL DISTRIBUTION CABINET SHALL ALSO BE PROTECTED AGAINST
PHYSICAL DAMAGE.
8. SUPERVISION (SINGLE OPENS & GROUNDS) OF THE INTERCONNECTIONS
BETWEEN POWER SUPPLY (24 VDC OUTPUT) TO NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET
AND BACKUP BATTERIES TO NRTL DISTRIBUTION CABINET IS PERFORMED BY
EQ2100PSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR.
9. THE CIRCUIT DISCONNECTING MEANS (AC & DC BREAKERS) SHALL BE
ACCESSIBLE ONLY TO AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL.
10. AC WIRING CABLE MUST BE ≤20 FEET IN CONDUIT.
Figure 3-21— Wiring Connections for a Power Supply Monitor, EQ21XXPS Series Power Supply and Backup Batteries
6. Connect the “B” terminal on the power supply 9. Set the device network address for the power
monitor to the negative (–) side of the backup supply monitor.
battery. Connect a correctly sized circuit breaker in
the battery circuit as shown in Figure 3-21. The NOTE
circuit breaker must be rated between 130% and For additional information, refer to the power
250% of the total load. supply manufacturer’s instruction manual
provided with the support documentation
7. Connect the “C” terminal on the power supply received with the Eagle Quantum Premier
monitor to the negative (–) side of the power supply. system.
8. Wire the power distribution circuit breakers to the output

STARTUP
of the power supply. Circuit breaker ratings must be
between 130% and 250% of the full load rating.
Turn on the power supply and allow the voltage to
stabilize at 27 volts before closing the circuit to the
battery.
14.1 3-25 95-8533

EQP2XX0PS(–X) POWER SUPPLIES
1 CURRENT SENSE +
AND REDUNDANCY MODULE
INSTALLATION
2 CURRENT SENSE –
WARNING!
3 BATTERY – ALWAYS follow all safety notes and instructions
when installing power supply or module!
4 BATTERY +
A1952
WARNING!
Figure 3-22—J2: Battery Test Points
Make sure a.c. power is OFF at main a.c. breaker
before beginning power supply installation!
MEASURING BATTERY VOLTAGE AND CHARGING
CURRENT
IMPORTANT!
Measure the battery voltage at terminals 3 and 4 of Power supplies require unrestricted air flow for
terminal block J2. See Figure 3-18 and 3-22. proper cooling.
To measure the battery charging current, connect a

digital voltmeter to terminals 1 and 2 of terminal block
MOUNTING
J2. The voltmeter will read 1 millivolt (0.001 volt) for each
2 amperes of current. Mount the power supply and Redundancy Module in a
Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) labeled
Current in Amperes = Meter reading in millivolts x 2 enclosure. Refer to the “Specifications” section for
mounting dimensions. Refer to power supply and
Example: A reading of 50 millivolts indicates a charging module manufacturer's instruction manual provided with
current of 100 amperes. support documentation received with the EQP system
for additional installation details and instructions.
WIRING
caution!
The power supply should be properly connected to
an earth ground! A ground wire MUST be connected
to the power supply units’s ground terminal!
1. Connect external wiring to the appropriate points

on Power Supplies.
Refer to Figure 3-23A for terminal locations for
EQP21X0PS(-X).
Refer to Figure 3-23B for terminal locations for
EQP2410PS(-P) Converter.
Refer to Figure 3-23C for terminal locations for
EQP2120PS(-X) with EQP2410PS(-P) Converter.
2. Connect the 24 VDC output to the Redundancy

Module. (Redundant “+” and “–” power supply
terminals are connected internally.)
14.1 3-26 95-8533

CB
AC POWER L –
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N
OUTPUT
G +
+
POWER SUPPLY
CB
– –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N
OUTPUT 1
G +
IN OUT + + POWER DIST CKT #1 –
+
2
POWER SUPPLY + POWER DIST CKT #2 –
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
D2445
NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED).

2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO ONE POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS
CONNECTED TO THE OTHER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 8 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC POWER.
4. THE SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONTINUOUSLY POWERED.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLIES AND REDUNDANCY MODULE.
Figure 3-23A—Wiring Connections for an EQP21X0PS(-X) Power Supply (Typical)
CB –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N OUTPUT
+
G
+
EQP2110PS(–P) POWER SUPPLY
– –
CB
24 VDC –
DC POWER +
OUTPUT 1
See Notes 1 & 2 – +
+
2
EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER + POWER DIST CKT #2 –
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
E2543
NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz. BOTH AC AND DC INPUTS ARE CUSTOMER SUPPLIED.
2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO AC POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONNECTED
TO DC CONVERTER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 8 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC/DC POWER.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLY, DC-DC CONVERTER, AND
REDUNDANCY MODULE.
Figure 3-23B—Wiring Connections for an EQP2110PS(-P) Power Supply with EQP2410PS(-P) Converter (Typical)
14.1 3-27 95-8533

CB –
AC POWER L
24 VDC –
See Notes 1 & 2 N OUTPUT 1
+
G IN OUT
+
EQP2120PS(–X) POWER SUPPLY

REDUNDANCY
MODULE
– –
CB
24 VDC –
DC POWER +
OUTPUT 1 +
See Notes 1 & 2 – +
+
2
EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER + POWER DIST CKT #2 –
REDUNDANCY
MODULE
–
+ 24 VDC –
OUTPUT
– +
+
EQP2410PS(–P) CONVERTER
A2566
NOTES: 1. AC INPUT IS AUTO-SELECTABLE FOR 120–220 VAC, 60/50 Hz. BOTH AC AND DC INPUTS ARE CUSTOMER SUPPLIED.
2. PRIMARY SOURCE OF INPUT SUPPLY IS CONNECTED TO AC POWER SUPPLY AND SECONDARY SOURCE IS CONNECTED
TO DC CONVERTER.
3. A MAXIMUM OF 4 REDUNDANT PAIRS CAN BE CONNECTED TO INPUT AC/DC POWER.
5. EQP CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS AC-DC POWER SUPPLY, DC-DC CONVERTER, AND
REDUNDANCY MODULE.
Figure 3-23C—Wiring Connections for One EQP2120PS(-X) Power Supply with Two EQP2410PS(-P) Converters (Typical)
3. To ensure compliance with NFPA 72, primary and No supervision is necessary, since the EDIO or
secondary power supplies shall be monitored for IDC module must be installed in the same
the presence of voltage at the point of connection cabinet with EQP21X0PS and EQP2410PS.
to the system. Connect the power supply unit for
preferred preventive function monitoring. Refer to
For USCG Approved System monitoring details, refer to
Figure 3-24 for an example of power supply
Appendix D.
relays wired in series for power monitoring.
NOTE
note
For additional information, refer to the power
Contacts are closed during normal operation.
supply manufacturer’s documents provided with
The circuit shall be wired to an input on the EQP
the support documentation received with the
system (EDIO or IDC). In Logic, the selected
Eagle Quantum Premier system.
input must be inverted and used to activate an
alarm trigger gate, which initiates a fault
message on the Controller and activates the fault
relay output.
To EDIO or IDC
PS 1 PS PS PS n
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
L PHOENIX –
QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS –
N N N N
+ + + +
DC + DC + DC + DC +
13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK
D2438
Figure 3-24—Power Supply and Converter Relays Wired in Series for Trouble Monitoring (up to 16 Power Supplies/Converters)
14.1 3-28 95-8533

STARTUP ENHANCED DISCRETE INPUT/
Turn on the power supply and allow the voltage to OUTPUT (EDIO) MODULE
stabilize. Verify the output voltage and adjust as INSTALLATION
needed. Refer to "EQP2XX0PS(–X) Power Supplies" All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
in the Specifications section of this manual. connectors furnished with the module. Refer to Figure
3-25 for identification of module wiring terminals.
IMPORTANT! Connector P1, Terminals 1 to 6

24 Vdc Power Input
The output voltage is adjustable. An even Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
current distribution must be ensured by 2. If additional terminals are required for powering
precisely setting all power supply units that are other devices, these devices should be connected to
operated in parallel to the same output voltage terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
±10 mV. terminals 3 and 6 — chassis (earth) ground terminals.
Total output current should be limited to 10 amperes.
IMPORTANT! Connector P2, Terminals 1 to 6

LON/SLC Signaling Circuit Terminals
To ensure symmetrical current distribution it is Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON/SLC.
recommended that all cable connections from all 1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
power supply units/diode redundancy modules 2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
to the power distribution bus are the same 4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
length and have the same cross section. 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
3, 6 — shield connection
Connector P3, Terminals 1 to 12

Terminals A,B & C
Channels 1 to 4 Input / Output Terminals
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each
diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8.
EQ3730EDIO
COMMON C 24
IN–/OUT+ B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD + SUPPLY A 22
LON FROM CLASS A
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE CHANNEL 7
A 4 COM 2 A COMMON C 21
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20 CHANNEL 7

LON TO + SUPPLY A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
+ SUPPLY A 16
CLASS A
CHANNEL 5
COMMON C 15
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
+ SUPPLY A 10
CLASS A
CHANNEL 3
COMMON C 9
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – COMMON C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + IN–/OUT+ B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD + SUPPLY A 4
24 VDC CLASS A
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1
+ 1 + COMMON C 3
POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2 CHANNEL 1

+ SUPPLY A 1
* SHIELDS ON POWER WIRES ARE OPTIONAL
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. A2287
Figure 3-25—EDIO Module Wiring Terminals
14.1 3-29 95-8533

Connector P4, Terminals 13 to 24 COMMON C 3
Terminals A, B & C
Refer to individual wiring configurations for terminal IN– / OUT+ B 2
descriptions. Only channel 1 is shown in each + SUPPLY A 1

diagram. The information is typical for channels 2-8. C2090
Figure 3-26—Unsupervised Input Configuration

Unsupervised Input
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-26. COMMON C 3
EOL
RESISTOR
The input to the EDIO consists of one or more normally 10 K Ω
open or normally closed switches. An EOL resistor is IN– / OUT+ B 2
not required. + SUPPLY A 1

C2091
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal. Figure 27—Supervised Input Configuration – Class B
Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision

COMMON C 6
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring,
see Figure 3-27. For Class A wiring, see Figure 3-28. IN– / OUT+ B 5
Note that two channels are used for one circuit when
using Class A wiring. + SUPPLY A 4
COMMON C 3
The input to the EDIO module consists of one or more EOL
normally open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt RESISTOR
10 K Ω
EOL resistor in parallel across the last switch. IN– / OUT+ B 2
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal. B2291

+ SUPPLY A 1
Figure 3-28—Supervised Input Configuration – Class A

Supervised Input Open and Short Circuit Supervision
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, COMMON C 3
see Figure 3-29. For Class A wiring, see Figure 3-30. INLINE
RESISTOR EOL
Note that two channels are used for one circuit when 3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
10 K Ω
using Class A wiring. Both wiring configurations
IN– / OUT+ B 2
provide indication of open and short circuit fault.
+ SUPPLY A 1
C2092
The input to the EDIO module consists of normally
open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor Figure 3-29—Supervised Input Configuration
for Opens and Shorts – Class B
in parallel across the return channel, and a 3.3 K ohm,
1/4 watt resistor in series with each switch.
COMMON C 6
NOTE
If using more than one switch, the first active
condition (switch closed) must be latched. Any INLINE
IN– / OUT+ B 5
subsequent closed switch will indicate a short RESISTOR
3.3 K Ω
circuit fault condition. + SUPPLY A 4
COMMON C 3
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal.
EOL
RESISTOR
Input — Deluge and Pre-Action 10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
The initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge and
pre-action system configuration must use Class A wiring + SUPPLY A 1
or be wired within 20 feet and in conduit from the EDIO. B2292
Figure 3-30—Supervised Input Configuration

for Opens and Shorts – Class A
14.1 3-30 95-8533

Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
The EDIO supports 2-wire devices from Kidde-Fenwal

and Apollo. Figure 3-31 shows the wiring for Apollo
detectors connected to EDIO Channel 1 through
terminals 1 and 2.
Figure 3-32 shows the typical wiring for Kidde-Fenwal

detectors connected to the EDIO through Channel 1
using terminals 1 and 2.
The EDIO supports either brand of detection products,

however, mixing brands is not supported on either a
single channel or module.
important
No more than 15 devices can be connected per
channel.
IN IN IN
+ SUPPLY A 1 L1 -R L1 -R L1 -R
EOL
RESISTOR
5KΩ
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
OUT OUT OUT
IN–/OUT+ B 2 A2283
COMMON C 3 UNUSED Figure 3-31—Apollo 2-Wire Devices
+ SUPPLY A 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
EOL
RESISTOR
3 3 5KΩ 3
7 6 7 6 7 6
IN–/OUT+ B 2 A2284
COMMON C 3 UNUSED Figure 3-32—Kidde-Fenwal 2-Wire Devices
Unsupervised Output
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-33. COMMON C 3
No connection should be made to “+ Supply”

terminal. IN– / OUT+ B 2
+ SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED

TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
A2321 WITHIN THE EDIO MODULE.
Figure 3-33—Unsupervised Output Configuration
14.1 3-31 95-8533

Supervised Output—
Notification Supervised for Open & Short Circuits COMMON C 3
EOL
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, RESISTOR
refer to Figure 3-34. 10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
For Class A wiring, refer to Figure 3-35. Note that two + SUPPLY A 1
channels are used for one output circuit.
The output of the EDIO module supervises the Figure 3-34—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)—
notification circuit by reversing the polarity of the Class B
monitoring circuit. Polarity must be observed when
connecting the notification device. It is essential to
utilize a notification device approved for fire alarm COMMON C 6
notification. These devices are polarized and would

not require the use of an external diode for the
supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more notification IN– / OUT+ B 5
devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL
resistor in parallel across the last device. + SUPPLY A 4
COMMON C 3
EOL
terminal. RESISTOR
10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Each output channel is individually activated for
response pattern: + SUPPLY A 1
A2285
– supervisory Figure 3-35—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)—

– continuous output Class A
– 60 beats per minute
– temporal
– timed COMMON C 3
– trouble.
Supervised Output—
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Agent Release (Solenoid Circuit)
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate + SUPPLY A 1 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
terminals on the terminal block. For Class B wiring, CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
WITHIN THE EDIO MODULE.
refer to Figure 3-36. A2322
Figure 3-36—Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)

For Class A wiring, refer to Figure 3-37. Note that two
channels are used for one output circuit. Trouble
indication is provided for any open wire and the
COMMON C 6
output can still be activated with a single open wire.

terminal. IN– / OUT+ B 5
+ SUPPLY A 4
The output of the EDIO module supervises the
releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid. COMMON C 3
It is essential to utilize a releasing device approved for
use with this output module. This type of output does NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO
NOT NEED TO BE INSTALLED
not require the use of EOL resistors or diodes to ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION IS
IN– / OUT+ B 2
supervise the circuit. PROVIDED WITHIN THE
EDIO MODULE.
+ SUPPLY A 1
B2286
Figure 3-37—Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)—

Class A Wiring
14.1 3-32 95-8533

The output can be configured for latching, Table 3-10—Maximum Wire Length for Releasing Applications
continuous, supervisory, trouble or timed response.
Maximum Wire Length in Feet
Device
To ensure adequate operating voltage for the output 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
device, the maximum wiring length from the power 890181* 150 100 60
source to the output device must not exceed the 895630* 150 100 60
values shown in Table 3-10 for automatic release
897494* 190 120 75
applications. (For solenoids, this wire length includes
both the wiring from the power supply to the EDIO 570537** 3000 1900 1200 750
module and the wiring from the module to the *Fenwal Solenoid
solenoid.) **Ansul Solenoid
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action

To ensure proper operating voltage, the input voltage
to the EDIO must be in the range from 21 to 30 vdc CONFIGURATION
and the maximum wiring length must not exceed the
values shown in Table 3-11 for deluge and pre-action Setting EDIO Network Address
applications. Per FM Approval requirements, the One unique network address must be assigned to
secondary power must provide capacity for a 90 hour each EDIO module. The address is set by the 8
minimum standby operation followed by a minimum of switch DIP assembly on the EDIO module.
10 minutes of releasing and alarm operation. The
initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge When using the switches located on the EDIO
and pre-action system configuration must use module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
Class A wiring or be wired in conduit within 20 feet of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
from the EDIO.
Each discrete point of an EDIO module has a tag
NOTE number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power tag number must include zone designation, which will
Supplies, the secondary power is customer be shown on the controller's display when the point is
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority in alarm.
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
device configuration. The following shows the
minimum software/firmware releases:
Controller Firmware S3
Revision Version Version
B 4.28 3.1.0.0
B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)
14.1 3-33 95-8533

8 CHANNEL DISCRETE INPUT/ WIRING
OUTPUT (DCIO) MODULE All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
INSTALLATION connectors furnished with the module. See Figure
3-38 for terminal identification.
install and configure the 8 Channel DCIO Module.
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
24 Vdc Power Input
MOUNTING
Power connections to the DCIO depend upon the total
The DCIO must be properly installed in a suitable
current consumption of all the channels in the device.
enclosure that is rated for the location. The enclosure
Each output-configured channel can consume up to 2
must provide space to install and wire the DCIO
amperes. Total output current should be limited to 10
module and must also provide for ground wire
amperes. Connect the power supply to terminals 1
termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
and 2 or to terminals 4 and 5. Power wire shielding
using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
should be connected to terminals 3 and 6.
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
of the location plus the temperature rise of all
1— +
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
2— –
3— Shield*
is going to be installed.
4— +
5— –
The DCIO can be panel or DIN rail mounted.
6— Shield*
NOTE
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4 *Shields on power wires are optional unless required
inches clearance between the module and other by local codes.
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring
and ventilation. Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
2. If additional terminals are required for powering
other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to
terminals 3 and 6.
COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6

LON Terminals
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
3 & 6 — shield connections.
14.1 3-34 95-8533

EQ3700DCIO
COMMON C 24
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20 CHANNEL 7

B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
+ SUPPLY A 16
COMMON C 15
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
+ SUPPLY A 10
COMMON C 9
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + IN–/OUT+ B 5 CHANNEL 2
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3
POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2 CHANNEL 1

+ SUPPLY A 1
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. B2097
Figure 3-38—DCIO Module Wiring Terminal Configuration
Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24

Terminals A, B & C
Unsupervised Input
terminals. See Figure 3-39.
COMMON C 3
Input to the DCIO consists of one or more normally

open or normally closed switches.
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Note
+ SUPPLY A 1
An EOL resistor is not required.
B2090
Note
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply”
terminal. Figure 3-39—Unsupervised Input Configuration
14.1 3-35 95-8533

COMMON C 3
COMMON C 3
EOL
EOL RESISTOR
RESISTOR 10 K Ω
10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
IN– / OUT+ B 2
+ SUPPLY A 1
+ SUPPLY A 1
B2091
Figure 3-40—Supervised Input Configuration Figure 3-42—Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)
Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision Supervised Output Notification (Horns and Strobes)
Class B Supervised Outputs for Open & Short Circuits
Class B
terminals on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
3-40. on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-42.
The input to the DCIO module consists of one or The output of the DCIO module supervises the
more normally open switches, with a 10K ohm, 1/4 notification circuit by reversing the polarity of the
watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last switch. monitoring circuit.
Note Note
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply” Polarity MUST be observed when connecting
terminal. the notification device.
Supervised Input (IDCSC) Open and Short Circuit It is critical to use a notification device approved for
Supervision fire alarm notification. These devices are polarized
(Three state – open, switch closure, and short) and do not require the use of an external diode for the
Class B supervision of the circuit. Wire one or more notification
devices to the output, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals
resistor in parallel across the last device.
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-41.
Indication of short circuit fault is provided.
Note
The input to the DCIO module consists of a normally
terminal.
open switch, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in
parallel across the switch, and a 3.3 K ohm, 1/4 watt
Each output channel is individually activated for
resistor in series with the switch.
response pattern:
Note – continuous output
terminal. For correct operation, only one input
switch can be used per channel. – 120 beats per minute
– temporal
– supervisory
COMMON C 3
INLINE
RESISTOR EOL
– timed
3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
10 K Ω – trouble.
IN– / OUT+ B 2
+ SUPPLY A 1
B2092
Figure 3-41—Supervised Input Configuration (Opens and Shorts)
14.1 3-36 95-8533

Supervised Output for Automatic Release The output of the DCIO module supervises the
Supervised Output for Open Circuits releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid.
It is essential to use a releasing device approved for
use with this output module.
Note
Wire one or more releasing devices to the module
This type of output does not require the use of
output.
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit.
Note
Make no connection to the “+ Supply” terminal.
Note
Fo r n e w o r r e t r o f i t i n s t a l l a t i o n s , a ny
The output of the DCIO module supervises the manufacturer’s non-water based agent release
releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing solenoid. valves can be wired into the outputs of the ARM
It is essential to use a releasing device approved for or DCIO modules as long as the devices utilize
use with this output module. 24 vdc and do not exceed 2 amperes current
draw.
Note
This type of output does not require the use of Note
EOL resistors or diodes to supervise the circuit. For FM system approval listing, pre-action and
deluge applications require that only FM
approved deluge valves can be wired into the
The output can be configured for latching, continuous
ARM or DCIO modules. Table 3-13 lists the
or timed response.
supported solenoid groups. Remember that the
valves must utilize 24 vdc and must not exceed
To ensure proper operating voltage, the maximum
2 amperes current draw.
wiring length from the power source to the DCIO
module must not exceed the values shown in Table
3-12 for automatic release applications.
or timed response.
Note
For solenoids, this wire length includes both the
to the DCIO must be in the range from 21 to 30 vdc
wiring from the power supply to the DCIO
and the maximum wiring length must not exceed the
module and the wiring from the module to the
values shown in Table 3-13 for deluge and pre-action
solenoid.
applications. Per FM Approval requirements, the
secondary power must provide capacity for a 90 hour
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action minimum standby operation followed by a minimum of
10 minutes of releasing and alarm operation. For
initiating device circuit(s) for use with the deluge
and pre-action system configuration, an Enhanced
Discrete Input/Output Module (EDIO) must be
used.
Table 3-12—Maximum Wire Length for Automatic Releasing

Applications
COMMON C 3
Device
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
890181* 150 100 60
IN– / OUT+ B 2
895630* 150 100 60
TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE. 897494* 190 120 75
A2323 WITHIN THE DCIO. 570537** 3000 1900 1200 750
*Fenwal Solenoid
Figure 3-43—Supervised Output Configuration (Automatic Release) **Ansul Solenoid
14.1 3-37 95-8533

Table 3-13—Maximum Wire Length for FM Approved Solenoids for Deluge and Pre-Action Applications
B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)
NOTE 8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE

In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power INSTALLATION
Supplies, the secondary power is customer
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority The following paragraphs describe how to properly
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). install and configure the 8 Channel Relay Module.
Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications

(Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection) MOUNTING
Connect external wiring to the appropriate terminals The Relay Module must be properly installed in a
on the DCIO terminal block. See Figure 3-44. suitable enclosure that is rated for the location. The
enclosure must provide space to install and wire the
Note relay module and must also provide for ground wire
No connection should be made to the “+ Supply” termination. Access into the enclosure is gained by
terminal. using a special tool to open the enclosure. The
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range
CONFIGURATION equipment installed inside the enclosure. The
Setting DCIO Network Address is going to be installed. The device can be panel or
One unique network address must be assigned to DIN rail mounted.
each DCIO module. The address is set by the 8
switch DIP assembly on the DCIO module. The NOTE
address is binary coded and is the sum of all It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
switches placed in the “closed” position. inches clearance between the module and other
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring
Each discrete point of a DCIO module has a tag and ventilation.
number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
tag number must include zone designation, which will
be shown on the controller's display when the point is WIRING
in alarm. All electrical connections are made to the field wiring
connectors furnished with the module. See Figure
Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for 3-45 for terminal identification.
device configuration. The following shows the
COMMON C 3
A 1.03 2.0.2.0 IN– / OUT+ B 2

A2323 WITHIN THE DCIO.
Figure 3-44—Unsupervised Output Configuration

14.1 3-38 95-8533
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 Channel Connectors, Terminals 1 to 24
24 Vdc Power Input
Unsupervised Output Ancillary Applications
1— + (Unrelated to Fire Detection/Protection)
2— –
3— Shield*
on the relay module terminal block. See Figure 3-45.
4— +
5— –
6— Shield* CONFIGURATION
*Shields on power wires are optional unless required
by local codes. Setting Relay Module Network Address
One unique network address must be assigned to
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and each relay module. The address is set by the 8
2. If additional terminals are required for powering switch DIP assembly on the relay module. The
other devices, these devices should be connected to address is binary coded and is the sum of all
terminals 4 and 5. Shields are to be connected to switches placed in the “closed” position.
terminals 3 and 6.
Each discrete point of a relay module has a tag
COM Connector, Terminals 1 to 6 number and a descriptor for unique identification.
LON Terminals
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON. device configuration. The following shows the
2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1 Controller Firmware S3
3 & 6 — shield connections. A 2.01 2.8.0.0
EQ3720RM
NC C 24
NO B 23 CHANNEL 8
SHLD 6 COM 2 SHLD COMMON A 22
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
A 4 COM 2 A NC C 21
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD NO B 20 CHANNEL 7

LON TO COMMON A 19
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
NC C 18
COM
NO B 17 CHANNEL 6
COMMON A 16
NC C 15
NO B 14 CHANNEL 5
COMMON A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND NC C 12
NO B 11 CHANNEL 4
COMMON A 10
NC C 9
NO B 8 CHANNEL 3
COMMON A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
– 5 – NC C 6
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + NO B 5 CHANNEL 2
SHLD* 3 SHLD COMMON A 4
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + NC C 3
POWER NO B 2 CHANNEL 1
COMMON A 1
UNLESS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. C2206
NOTE: RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN IN REST (DE-ENERGIZED) STATE.
Figure 3-45— Relay Module Wiring Terminal Configuration
14.1 3-39 95-8533

ANALOG INPUT MODULE Power Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
INSTALLATION 24 Vdc Power Input
1— +
MOUNTING 2— –
3— Shield*
The Analog Input Module must be properly installed in
4— +
a suitable enclosure that is rated for the location. The
5— –
enclosure must provide space to install and wire the
6— Shield*
device and must also provide for ground wire
termination. Access into the enclosure must be gained
by using a special tool to open the enclosure. The *Shields on power wires are optional unless required
enclosure should be rated for the temperature range by local codes.
equipment installed inside the enclosure. The Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
enclosure must be rated for electrical equipment that 2. If additional terminals are required for powering
is going to be installed. other devices, these devices should be connected to
NOTE terminals 3 and 6.
It is recommended to maintain a minimum of 4
inches clearance between the module and other COM Connector — Terminals 1 to 6
equipment to provide adequate room for wiring LON Terminals
and ventilation.
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON.
WIRING 2 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring 4 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
connectors furnished with the module. (Connectors 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
accept up to 12 AWG wire.) Refer to Figure 3-46 for 3 & 6 — shield connections (shields required).
identification of module wiring terminals.
EQ3710AIM
COMMON C 24
4-20 MA IN B 23 CHANNEL 8
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD 4-20 MA IN B 20 CHANNEL 7

B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM
+ SUPPLY A 16
COMMON C 15
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
+ SUPPLY A 10
COMMON C 9
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + 4-20 MA IN B 5 CHANNEL 2
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3
POWER 4-20 MA IN B 2 CHANNEL 1

+ SUPPLY A 1
Figure 3-46—Analog Input Module Wiring Terminal Configuration
14.1 3-40 95-8533

CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
COMMON C 3 COMMON C 3 –
4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 SIG
+ SUPPLY A 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 +
A2235 A2236
Figure 3-47—Two-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Figure 3-49—Three-Wire Transmitter — Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA

Current Output (Sourcing) Current Output (Sourcing)
CHANNEL 1 HIM CHANNEL 1 HIM TRANSMITTER
COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 TRANSMITTER COMMON C 3 6 COMMON 3 –
4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG 4-20 MA IN B 2 5 4-20 MA IN 2 SIG
+ SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 + + SUPPLY A 1 4 + SUPPLY 1 +

A2238 A2239
Figure 3-48—Two-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module — Figure 3-50—Three-Wire Transmitter with HART Interface Module —
Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing) Non-Isolated 4 to 20 mA Current Output (Sourcing)
Channel Connectors — Terminals 1 to 24 CONFIGURATION

4-20 mA Input Devices
Setting Analog Input Module Network Address
on the analog input module terminal block. See One unique network address must be assigned to
Figure 3-47 for an example of a 2-wire input. See each analog input module. The address is set by the
Figure 3-48 for a 2-wire input with HART interface 8 switch DIP assembly on the analog input module.
module. See Figure 3-49 for a 3-wire input, where the
transmitter must source a 4-20 mA signal. See Figure When using the switches located on the analog input
3-50 for a 3-wire input with HART interface module. module, the address is binary coded and is the sum
of all switches placed in the “closed” position.
Only channel 1 is shown in each diagram. The
information is typical for channels 2-8. Each point of an analog input module has a tag
number and a descriptor for unique identification. A
Analog Input Module Channels used as NFPA 72 tag number must include zone designation, which will
Approved 4-20 mA Flame Detector Input be shown on the controller's display when the point is
in alarm.
Configure the High Alarm setpoint at 19 mA via the S3
configuration screen, and use the High Alarm to
trigger the Fire Alarm in S3 logic. The AIM sends an
device configuration. The following tables show the
exception message for the High Alarm so there is no
delay in transmitting the Fire Alarm.
Fault indications and other status information must be For Gas Applications
decoded in logic from the analog process variable. A Controller Firmware* AIM S3
five second delay should be used to avoid indicating Rev. Version Rev. Version Version
an incorrect status condition while the analog value is B 3.06 B 1.02 2.9.1.1
changing between two values. See Table 3-14.
*for part number 007606-002
Table 3-14—Analog Values (in mA) for Fault and Status Indications
when the AIM is Used as a 4-20 mA Flame Detector Input
For Flame Applications
Status X3301/2 X5200 X9800 X2200 Controller Firmware* AIM S3
Fault 0-3.5 0-3.5 0-3.5 0-3.5 Rev. Version Rev. Version Version
IR Pre-Alarm 7.0-9.0 C 5.52 D 1.07 4.0.0.0
UV Alarm 11.0-12.99 *for part number 008983-001
IR Alarm 13.0-14.99
Pre-Alarm 15.0-16.99 15.0-16.99 15.0-16.99
14.1 3-41 95-8533

INTELLIGENT PROTECTION LON Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
MODULE INSTALLATION LON/SLC Signaling Circuit Terminals
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the LON/SLC.
WIRING shield connection — terminals 3 and 6.
All electrical connections are made to the field wiring 1 — "A" side of signaling circuit for COM 1
connectors furnished with the module. Refer to Figure
3-51 for identification of module wiring terminals.
Power Connector, Terminals 1 to 6
24 Vdc Power Input 5 — "B" side of signaling circuit for COM 2
Connect the module power supply to terminals 1 and
2. If additional terminals are required for powering
other devices, these devices should be connected to
terminals 3 and 6 — chassis (earth) ground terminals.
Terminals are rated for 10 amperes. Use both sets of
input terminals in parallel if total output current can
exceed 10 amperes.
EQ3740IPM
COMMON C 24
CHANNEL 8
IN–/OUT+ B 23
RELEASE-2
LON FROM
B 5 COM 2 B
PREVIOUS DEVICE
CHANNEL 7
SHLD 3 COM 1 SHLD IN–/OUT+ B 20
RELEASE-1
B 2 COM 1 B
NEXT DEVICE
A 1 COM 1 A
COMMON C 18
COM CHANNEL 6
IN–/OUT+ B 17
BELL
+ SUPPLY A 16
COMMON C 15
CHANNEL 5
IN–/OUT+ B 14
ZONE-2
+ SUPPLY A 13
TO
EARTH
GROUND COMMON C 12
CHANNEL 4
IN–/OUT+ B 11
ZONE-1
+ SUPPLY A 10
COMMON C 9
CHANNEL 3
IN–/OUT+ B 8
SUPERVISORY
+ SUPPLY A 7
SHLD* 6 SHLD
24 VDC
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 4 + CHANNEL 2
IN–/OUT+ B 5
MANUAL RELEASE
24 VDC
– 2 –
INPUT VOLTAGE
+ 1 + COMMON C 3
CHANNEL 1
POWER IN–/OUT+ B 2
ABORT
+ SUPPLY A 1
Figure 3-51—IPM Wiring Terminal Configuration
14.1 3-42 95-8533

Channels 1 to 3, Terminals 1 to 9
Channels 1 to 3 Inputs COMMON C 3
IN– / OUT+ B 2
Unsupervised Input
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate + SUPPLY A 1
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-52. B2090
The input to the IPM consists of one or more normally

open switches. An EOL resistor is not required. Figure 3-52—Unsupervised Input Configuration

terminal.
NOTE
Unsupervised inputs are not recommended for
fire alarm applications.
COMMON C 3
Supervised Input (IDC) Open Circuit Supervision EOL

RESISTOR
(Two State – Open and Switch Closure) 10 K Ω
Class B IN– / OUT+ B 2
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate + SUPPLY A 1

terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-53.
B2091
The input to the IPM consists of one or more normally

open switches, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor
Figure 3-53—Supervised Input Configuration
in parallel across the last switch.
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal.
Supervised Input (IDCSC) Open and Short Circuit

Supervision
(Three state – open, switch closure, and short)
Class B COMMON C 3
INLINE
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate RESISTOR EOL
3.3 K Ω RESISTOR
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-54. 10 K Ω
IN– / OUT+ B 2
The input to the IPM consists of a normally open
switch, with a 10 K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in + SUPPLY A 1
parallel across the switch, and a 3.3 K ohm, 1/4 watt
resistor in series with the switch. B2092
Make no connection to “+ Supply” terminal. Figure 3-54—Supervised Input Configuration (Opens and Shorts)
14.1 3-43 95-8533

Channels 4 and 5, Terminals 10 to 15 Channel 6, Terminals 16 to 18
ZONE-1 and ZONE-2 Inputs Unsupervised Output
The IPM supports 2-wire devices from Kidde-Fenwal Connect external system wiring to the appropriate
and Apollo. Figure 3-55 shows the wiring for Apollo terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-57. No
detectors connected to IPM Channel 4 through connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.
terminals 10 and 11.
Figure 3-56 shows the typical wiring for Kidde-Fenwal
detectors connected to the IPM through Channel 5
using terminals 13 and 14. COMMON C 18
IPM Channels 4 and 5, labeled “Zone-1” and “Zone-2” BELL, HORN,

STROBE, ETC.
on the modules wiring legend, support either brand of
detection products however mixing brands is not IN– / OUT+ B 17
supported on either a single channel or module. + SUPPLY A 16 NOTE: SHUNT/FLYBACK DIODES DO NOT NEED
Notes: 1. Contact devices such as Fenwal heat B2093
WITHIN THE IPM.
detectors may be used on ZONE 1 and 2
inputs as NFPA Class B circuit if supervision Figure 3-57—CH-6: Unsupervised Output Configuration
is selected.
2. The initiating device circuit(s) for use with the
deluge and pre-action system configuration must
be wired within 20 feet and in conduit from the
IPM.
IN IN IN
+ SUPPLY A 10 L1 -R L1 -R L1 -R
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
OUT OUT OUT
IN–/OUT+ B 11 A2241
COMMON C 12 UNUSED Figure 3-55—CH-4 and/or 5: Apollo 2-wire devices
+ SUPPLY A 13
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 3 3
7 6 7 6 7 6
IN–/OUT+ B 14 A2242
COMMON C 15 UNUSED Figure 3-56—CH-4 and/or 5: Kidde-Fenwal 2-wire devices
14.1 3-44 95-8533

Supervised Output
Notification Supervised for Open & Short Circuits COMMON C 18
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate EOL
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-58. RESISTOR

10 K Ω
The output of the IPM supervises the notification circuit IN– / OUT+ B 17
by reversing the polarity of the monitoring circuit. + SUPPLY A 16

Polarity must be observed when connecting the
notification device. It is essential to utilize a notification B2094
device approved for fire alarm notification. These Figure 3-58—CH-6: Supervised Output Configuration (Notification)
devices are polarized and would not require the use of
an external diode for the supervision of the circuit. Wire
one or more notification devices to the output, with a 10
K ohm, 1/4 watt EOL resistor in parallel across the last COMMON C 21
device.
No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal.
Each output channel is individually activated for IN– / OUT+ B 20
response pattern:
– supervisory TO BE INSTALLED ON THE FIELD DEVICE.
– continuous output WITHIN THE IPM.

Figure 3-59—CH-7&8: Supervised Output Configuration (Agent Release)
– temporal
– trouble. Table 3-15—Maximum Wire Length for Releasing Applications

Channels 7 and 8, Terminals 19 to 24 Device
Supervised Output Agent Release
890181* 150 100 60
Connect external system wiring to the appropriate 895630* 150 100 60
terminals on the terminal block. See Figure 3-59.
897494* 190 120 75
No connection should be made to “+ Supply” terminal. 570537** 3000 1900 1200 750
The output of the IPM supervises the releasing circuit via *Fenwal Solenoid
the coil of the releasing solenoid. It is essential to utilize **Ansul Solenoid
a releasing device approved for use with this output
module. This type of output does not require the use of
CONFIGURATION
The output can be configured for continuous or timed
response. Setting Module Network Address
To ensure adequate operating voltage for the output One unique network address must be assigned to
device, the maximum wiring length from the power each intelligent protection module. The address is set
source to the output device must not exceed the values by the 8 switch DIP assembly on the module. The
shown in Table 3-15 for automatic release applications address is binary coded and is the sum of all
or Table 3-16 for deluge and pre-action applications. switches placed in the “closed” position.
For solenoids, this wire length includes both the wiring
from the power supply to the IPM and the wiring from the Each discrete point of an intelligent protection module
module to the solenoid. has a tag number and a descriptor for identification.
Note Det-Tronics S3 Safety System Software is used for
For FM system approval listing, pre-action and device configuration. The following shows the
deluge applications require that only FM approved minimum software/firmware releases:
deluge valves can be wired into the IPM module.
Remember that the valves must utilize 24 vdc and
must not exceed 2 amperes current draw.
B 3.06 2.9.0.1
14.1 3-45 95-8533

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)
GAS DETECTOR LOCATION AND Note

INSTALLATION The use of the Sensor Separation Kit will be
required in some installations.
Gas detection devices must be properly located to
provide maximum protection. Determining the proper
number of devices and placement varies depending ENVIRONMENTS AND SUBSTANCES THAT
on the specific requirements of the area of protection. AFFECT GAS DETECTOR PERFORMANCE
Catalytic sensors should be located where they are
The following should be considered when locating a
safe from potential sources of contamination that can
gas detection device:
cause a decrease in the sensitivity of the device
including:
1. Gas type. If it is lighter than air (acetylene,
hydrogen, methane, etc.), place the sensor above
A. Substances that can clog the pores of the flame
the potential source. Place the sensor close to
arrestor and reduce the gas diffusion rate to the
the floor for gases that are heavier than air
sensor including:
(benzene, butane, butylene, propane, hexane,
pentane, etc.) or for vapors resulting from
Dirt and oil, corrosive substances such as Cl 2
flammable liquid spills.
(Chlorine) or HCl, paint overspray, or residue from
cleaning solutions that can clog the flame arrestor.
NOTE
Air currents can cause a gas that is heavier than
Note
air to rise. Also, if the gas is hotter than ambient
A dust cover should be installed to protect the
air, it could also rise.
flame arrester whenever these conditions exist.
2. How rapidly will the gas diffuse into the air? B. Substances that cover or tie up the active sites on
Select a location for the sensor as close as the catalytic surface of the active sensing element
possible to the anticipated source of a gas leak. such as volatile metal organics, gases, or vapors
of hydrides, and volatile compounds containing
3. Ventilation characteristics. Air movement will phosphorous, boron, silicone, etc.
cause gas to accumulate more heavily in one area
than another. The devices should be placed in Examples:
areas where the most concentrated accumulation RTV silicone sealants
of gas is anticipated. Silicone oils and greases
Tetraethyl lead
4. Devices should be pointed down to prevent the Phosphine
buildup of moisture or contaminants on the filter. Diborane
Silane
5. Devices must be accessible for testing and Trimethyl chlorsilane
calibration. Hydrogen fluoride
Boron trifluoride
Phosphate esters
14.1 3-46 95-8533

C. Materials that remove the catalytic metals from the EQ22XXDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT USED
active element of the sensor. Some substances WITH DET-TRONICS H2S/O2 SENSORS OR OTHER
react with the catalytic metal forming a volatile TWO-WIRE 4-20 MA DEVICES
compound that can erode the metal from the
Determine the best mounting locations for the
surface of the sensor’s active element.
detectors. Whenever practical, detectors should be
placed where they are easily accessible for
Halogens and compounds containing halogen are
calibration.
materials of this nature and others include:
Examples: WARNING!
Chlorine
Do not apply power to the system with the cover
Bromine
removed unless the area has been verified to be
Iodine
free of combustible gases or vapors.
Hydrogen Chloride, Bromide or Iodide
Organic halides:
The DCU utilizes the following:
Trichloroethylene
Dichlorobenzene
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of
Vinyl chloride
the junction box.
Freons
Halon 1301
2. A communication module mounted above the
(Bromotrifluoromethane).
terminal wiring board using the standoffs
provided. See Figure 3-60.
Note
Brief exposure to these materials can temporarily
increase sensor sensitivity due to the surface of Assembly and Wiring Procedure
the active element being etched. Prolonged
Attach the sensor to the DCU enclosure. Do not over-
exposure continues this process until the
tighten. If a sensor separation kit is being used,
sensitivity of the sensor is degraded, resulting in
attach the sensor to the separation kit junction box
shortened sensor life.
and wire the device as described in the “Sensor
Separation” section.
D. Exposure to high concentrations of combustible
gases for extended periods of time can stress the
sensing element and seriously affect its
performance.
The degree of damage to the sensor is COMMUNICATION MODULE
determined by a combination of contaminant

type, contaminant concentration in the
atmosphere, and the length of time the sensor is
exposed.
Note
If a sensor has been exposed to a contaminant
or a high level of combustible gas, it should be
calibrated at the time of exposure. An additional STANDOFFS (4)
calibration a few days later should be performed

to determine whether a significant shift in TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
sensitivity has occurred. If necessary, sensor
should be replaced.
Note
A1571
A combination of accessories such as rain
shields and dust covers is not recommended
and can result in slow response to a gas leak. Figure 3-60—Printed Circuit Boards in Universal DCU
14.1 3-47 95-8533

CAUTION! POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1
The sensor threads can be coated with an

4 TO 20 MA IN 2
appropriate grease to ease installation. Also
lubricate the cover threads. (See “Ordering
– 3
Information” for part number of recommended
lubricant.) SENSOR POWER
+ 4
Connect the external wiring to the appropriate

A
terminals on the DCU terminal wiring board. Refer to 5
Figure 3-61 for terminal identification. See Figure 3-62 COM 2

B
for an example of a Det-Tronics electrochemical 6
sensor connected to a DCU.

7 14 –
Attach the communication module to the standoffs as COM SHIELD

13 –
shown in Figure 3-60. Connect the ribbon cable from 8
24 VDC
the terminal wiring board to the communication
A 12 +
module. 9
COM 1
B 11 +
Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting 10
A1726
Device Network Addresses” for complete information
regarding the switch setting procedure.
Figure 3-61—Wiring Configuration for DCU
Check the wiring to ensure proper connections, then
pour the conduit seals and allow them to dry (if DCU H2S/TOXIC/O2
conduit is being used).

POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1
NOTE
4 TO 20 MA IN 2 BLACK
Before placing the cover back on the enclosure
following completion of assembly and wiring,
– 3 RED
inspect the enclosure O-ring to be sure that it is
SENSOR POWER
in good condition and properly installed.
+ 4 GREEN
Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of the cover
with a thin coat of an appropriate grease to ease
A 5
installation. Refer to the “Ordering Information”
COM 2
section for the part number of the recommended
B 6
grease (available from Detector Electronics). If
the installation uses catalytic type combustible
7 14 –
gas sensors, it is imperative that lubricants
COM SHIELD
containing silicone not be used, since they will
8 13 –
cause irreversible damage to the sensor. Place
24 VDC
the cover on the enclosure. Tighten only until
A 9 12 +
snug. Do not over tighten.
COM 1
B 10 11 +
Sensor Separation for DCU with H2S and O2 A1875
Sensors
Since the transmitter for the electrochemical sensor is Figure 3-62—Electrochemical Sensor Connected to DCU
already mounted within the sensor housing, simply
mount the entire sensor assembly to the sensor
Table 3-17
separation kit junction box and wire it to terminals 2 Maximum Separation Distances — Electrochemical Sensor to DCU
and 4 inside the DCU, the same as a regular (without
sensor separation) installation. Connect the shield to Wire Size Maximum Wiring Distance
the ground terminal in the DCU junction box.
(AWG) Feet Meters
Refer to Table 3-17 for separation distance limitations 18 5700 1750

for H2S and O2 sensors. 16 9000 2800
T0020A
14.1 3-48 95-8533

EQ22XXDCU DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT DCU POINTWATCH
USED WITH POINTWATCH/DUCTWATCH

POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1 YELLOW
Determine the best mounting location for the detector.

Whenever practical, detectors should be placed 4 TO 20 MA IN 2 WHITE
where they are easily accessible for calibration.

– 3 BLACK
WARNING! SENSOR POWER

+ 4 RED

removed unless the area has been verified to be A 5 GREEN
free of combustible gases and vapors. COM 2

B 6
The DCU utilizes the following:

7 14 –
1. A terminal wiring board mounted at the bottom of COM SHIELD
the junction box. 8 13 –

24 VDC
2. A communication module mounted above the A 9 12 +

terminal wiring board using the standoffs COM 1
provided. See Figure 3-60. B 10 11 +

A1876
Assembly and Wiring Procedure

Figure 3-63—PointWatch/DuctWatch Connected to DCU
Attach the PointWatch/DuctWatch to the DCU
enclosure. Do not over-tighten. If a sensor
separation kit is being used, attach the sensor to the
separation kit junction box and wire the device as
described in the “Sensor Separation” section. Sensor Separation for DCU with PointWatch
Shielded four wire cable is recommended for
Refer to the PointWatch instruction manual (form connecting the detector junction box to the DCU.
number 95-8440) or the DuctWatch instruction manual Cable with a foil shield is recommended. The shield
(form number 95-8573) for complete installation and of the cable should be open at the detector junction
application information. box and connected to earth ground at the DCU
junction box.
Refer to Figure 3-63 when wiring a PointWatch IR gas
detector and a DCU. The wiring code for PointWatch NOTE
is: To ensure proper operation, it is essential to
Red = + (24 vdc) maintain a minimum of 18 vdc (including ripple)
Black = – (common) at the PointWatch detector.
White = 4 to 20 ma signal
Yellow = Calibration input
Green = Chassis ground
Set the address for the device. Refer to “Setting

Device Network Addresses” for complete information
regarding the switch setting procedure.
14.1 3-49 95-8533

EQ22XXDCUEX DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT 7. Plug the sensor into P2 on the transmitter board.
(USED WITH DET-TRONICS COMBUSTIBLE GAS
SENSORS) 8. Mount the transmitter board to the terminal wiring
board and attach with the standoffs.
Mounting
NOTE
Determine the best mounting location for the device.
Be sure to note the correct orientation of the
Whenever practical, the device should be placed
transmitter board. If the transmitter board is
where it can easily be reached for calibration.
rotated 180° from proper orientation, the device
w i l l n o t o p e r a t e c o r r e c t l y — a LO N
IMPORTANT!
communication fault will result. See Figure 3-65.
Always orient the junction box with the sensor
pointing down. 9. Plug the ribbon cable into the communication
module and re-attach it to the transmitter board.
WARNING! 10. Set the device network address. (See “Setting

Device Network Addresses” in this section.)
removed unless the area has been verified to be
11. Inspect the junction box O-ring to be sure that it is
free of combustible gases or vapors.
in good condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the
threads of the junction box cover with a thin coat
Wiring of silicone-free grease (available from Det-
Tronics).
1. Remove the cover from the DCUEX.
12. Replace the device cover.
CAUTION!
ALWAYS discharge static from tools and hands
DCU TERMINAL BOARD DCU TRANSMITTER BOARD1
by touching the device body before touching the (MIDDLE BOARD)
communication module or transmitter board. POINTWATCH CALIBRATE 1
2. Loosen the screws on the communication module 4 TO 20 MA IN 2

2
SIG
and remove it from the transmitter board
standoffs. – 3
2
–
SENSOR POWER
3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e r i b b o n c a b l e f ro m t h e + 4
2
+
communication module.
A 5
4. Remove the standoffs and detach the transmitter COM 2
board from the terminal wiring board. Do not B 6
disconnect any wiring.
7 14 –
5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring COM SHIELD
board. (See Figure 3-64.) 8 13 –
24 VDC
Note A 9 12 +
Make sure the ribbon cable is connected to the COM 1
terminal wiring board. B 10 11 +
B1877
6. Attach the sensor to the device enclosure. DO NOTES: 1 Catalytic Combustible Gas Sensor
NOT overtighten. Plugs into Connector Pins on the
Middle Board inside the Junction Box.
2 Connections Wired at the Factory.

Note
If a sensor separation kit is being used, attach
the sensor to the separation kit junction box. Figure 3-64—DCU Transmitter Board Connected
to Terminal Wiring Board
(See Sensor Separation with DCUEX below.)
14.1 3-50 95-8533

COMMUNICATION MODULE Sensor Separation with DCUEX
If the installation requires mounting the sensor in a
different location than the DCUEX, observe the
SWITCHES ON SAME SIDE
(RIGHT) following guidelines.
There are two (2) methods that can be used to

TRANSMITTER BOARD separate the sensor from the DCUEX:
Preferred Method
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
1. Disassemble the DCUEX and remove the
transmitter board. (Refer to “Wiring” for
disassembly procedure.) Do not re-assemble at
CORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD this time.
2. Mount the transmitter board inside the sensor

separation junction box (remove the existing
COMMUNICATION MODULE board).
N G Note
This assembly can be separated from the
O
SWITCHES ON OPPOSITE SIDES
(WRONG) DCUEX by up to 1000 feet using three conductor
R
18 AWG shielded cable. (Regardless of
separation distance, operating voltage at the
W
TRANSMITTER BOARD
transmitter must be at least 18 vdc for proper
device operation.) (See Figure 3-66.)
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD
3. Mount the sensor to the separation junction box.

DO NOT overtighten. Plug the sensor into P2 on
the transmitter board.
INCORRECT ORIENTATION OF TRANSMITTER BOARD
4. Use a three conductor 18 AWG shielded cable to

connect P1 on the transmitter board to terminals
2, 3 and 4 on the DCU terminal board (See Figure
3-66). Connect the shield to the ground terminal
in the DCUEX junction box.
COMMUNICATION MODULE
5. Connect all external wiring to the terminal wiring
board inside the DCU (if not already completed).
Re-assemble the DCUEX as described in the
“Wiring” section. When completed, it should look
TRANSMITTER BOARD similar to the DCU as shown in Figure 3-60.
6. Inspect the O-ring on the DCU and separation

STANDOFFS (4)
junction box to be sure that they are in good
condition. Lubricate the O-ring and the threads of
TERMINAL WIRING BOARD the junction box cover with a thin coat of silicone-
free grease (available from Det-Tronics).
B1570 7. Replace the cover on the DCU and separation

junction box.
Figure 3-65—Printed Circuit Boards in Combustible Gas DCU
14.1 3-51 95-8533

Table 3-18—Maximum Separation Distances —
Combustible Gas Sensor to DCU (Alternate Method)
Maximum Separation Distance

Wire Size
Feet Meters
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)* 40 12
16 AWG (1.5 mm2)* 60 18
14 AWG (2.5 mm2)* 100 30
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)* 150 45
*Approximate Metric Equivalent.
Alternate Method
–
GR
If the transmitter board must be mounted separate

N
+
from the sensor (high temperature applications, etc.),
separate the sensor only, leaving the transmitter PC
–
board inside the DCUEX enclosure. When using this

GR
N
installation option, see Table 3-18 for maximum wiring

distances.
ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSOR
Mount the sensor directly to the separation kit junction
box. Use three conductor shielded cable for the
connection between the terminal block in the
separation kit junction box and P2 on the DCUEX
SPARE CHASSIS
transmitter board. A plug with screw terminals is
CAL CAL provided for connecting the cable to P2 on the
transmitter board. Observe the wiring color code.
4-20 4-20
RET RET
Connect the shield to the ground terminal in the

GND
+24 +24
DCUEX junction box.
DCU TERMINAL BOARD
1 POINTWATCH CALIBRATE
POINTWATCH
2 4 TO 20 MA IN
P1
3 –
SENSOR POWER
4 +
SIG – +
A 5
COM 2
4 TO 20 TRANSMITTER BOARD
– B 6
+
7 14 –
COM SHIELD
P2
8 13 –
NOTE: ALWAYS ORIENT 24 VDC
JUNCTION BOX WITH
CATALYTIC SENSOR
POINTING DOWN. A 9 12 +
COM 1
SENSOR
B 10 11 +
C1878
CATALYTIC SENSOR
Figure 3-66—Sensor Separation Kits
14.1 3-52 95-8533

EQ25XXARM SERIES AGENT RELEASE MODULE Terminals 5 to 10 — LO N s i g n a l i n g c i r c u i t
terminals
Mounting
Note
Be sure to observe polarity when wiring the
LON.
device dimensions.)
5— “A” side of signaling
Wiring circuit for COM 2
To ensure proper operating voltage for the output 6— “B” side of signaling
device, the maximum wiring length from power source circuit for COM 2
to device must not exceed the values shown in Table
3-19 for automatic release applications or Table 3-20 7 and 8 — s h i e l d
for deluge and pre-action applications. connections
Note 9— “A” side of signaling

For solenoids, this wire length includes both the circuit for COM 1
wiring from power supply to device, and the
10 — “B” side of signaling
wiring from device to solenoid.
circuit for COM 1
See Figure 3-67 for identification of wiring terminals. Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input
Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals Connect module power

supply to terminals 12 and
Connect a single solenoid 13.
between terminals 1 and 4.
Connect dual solenoids Note
between terminals 1 and 2, If an auxiliary output supply is used for powering
and between terminals 3 and solenoids, it should be connected to terminals 11
4. and 14.
NOTE
For testing purposes, a load resistor of 1200 to
1500 ohms @ 1 watt can be placed across Table 3-19—Maximum Wiring Length for Automatic Release
terminals 1 and 4. Applications

Device
CAUTION! 890181* 150 100 60
DO NOT intermix different types of initiators in 895630* 150 100 60
release circuit. 897494* 190 120 75
570537** 3000 1900 1200 750
*Fenwal Solenoid
**Ansul Solenoid
14.1 3-53 95-8533

B ASCO T8210A107 183 (56) 115 (35) 72 (22) 46 (14)

D ASCO 8210G207 314 (96) 198 (60) 124 (38) 78 (24)
H Viking HV-274-0601 180 (55) 110 (34) 70 (21) 45(14)
SINGLE DUAL
SOLENOID SOLENOIDS
+ 1
– 2
+ 3
– 4
A 5
COM 2
B 6
7 14 –
COM SHIELD
8 13 –
24 VDC
A 9 12 +
COM 1
B 10 11 +
NOTE:
TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP2 AND JP3 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.
Figure 3-67—Wiring Configuration

EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR OPTION for Agent Release Module
SEE NOTE 2.
NOTES:
1. JUMPER JP1 MUST BE REMOVED IF EXPLOSIVE INITIATOR IS USED.
14.1 3-5410 OHMS CIRCUIT RESISTANCE.

2. RESISTOR IS USED TO COMPENSATE FOR 95-8533
RESISTOR MUST BE RATED 1 WATT MINIMUM (WIRE-WOUND RESISTOR PREFERRED).
WHEN MEASURING THE TOTAL RELEASE CIRCUIT RESISTANCE,
USE AN OHM METER WITH A CURRENT OUTPUT OF 10 MA MAXIMUM.
3. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF EXPLOSIVE INITIATORS PER CIRCUIT IS 12.

EACH CIRCUIT MUST NOT EXCEED 10 OHMS INCLUDING CABLE RESISTANCE. B1900
Supervised Output for Deluge and Pre-action
on the terminal block. See Figure 3-67. Wire one or JP1
more releasing devices to the module output. JP2
JP3
11 12 13 14
The output of the Agent Release Module supervises

the releasing circuit via the coil of the releasing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
solenoid. It is essential to use a releasing device
approved for use with this output module.
Note
This type of output does not require the use of A1902
Figure 3-68—Agent Release Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers

or timed response.

to the release module must be in the range from 21 to EQ25XXSAM SERIES SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
30 vdc and the maximum wiring length must not
exceed the values shown in Table 3-20 for deluge and Mounting
pre-action applications. Per FM Approval
requirements, the secondary power must provide
capacity for a 90 hour minimum standby operation
device dimensions.)
followed by a minimum of 10 minutes of releasing and
alarm operation. The initiating device circuit(s) for
use with the deluge and pre-action system Wiring
configuration must be wired within 20 feet and in
conduit from an IDC or DCIO. In addition, power for
IMPORTANT!
the device(s) must be per NFPA 72 Class A wiring
techniques. To ensure adequate operating voltage for the
signaling device, the maximum wiring length
NOTE from the power source to the output device must
In EQP systems with EQP2120PS(–B) Power not exceed the values shown in Table 3-21. (This
Supplies, the secondary power is customer wire length includes both the wiring from the
supplied and must be accepted by the Authority power supply to the signal audible module and
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). the wiring from the module to the signaling
device.)
Jumpers See Figure 3-69 for identification of wiring terminals.

Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper
JP3. These two jumpers (JP2 and JP3) must be cut if Table 3-21—Maximum Wiring Length
from Nominal 24 VDC Power Source to Signaling Device
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See
Figure 3-68 for jumper locations.)
Maximum Wire Length in Feet (Meters)
When an explosive initiator is being used, jumper JP1 12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG
must be cut. If a solenoid is used, the jumper must (4 mm2)* (2.5 mm2)* (1.5 mm2)*
remain in. One 2 Ampere Load 190 (58) 120 (37) 75 (23)
Address Setting Two 2 Ampere Loads 95 (29) 60 (18) 35 (11)
Set the device network address. (See “Setting Device * Approximate Metric Equivalent. T0029A
Network Addresses” in this section.)
14.1 3-55 95-8533

Terminals 1 to 4 — Output terminals
+ 1
Connect the first output OUTPUT 1* 10K EOL
–
device between terminals 1 2
and 2, and the second

+
between terminals 3 and 4. 3
OUTPUT 2* 10K EOL
–
Note 4
Polarity shown in Figure 3-69 is for monitoring

condition; polarity is reversed when activated. A 5
COM 2
Each circuit must have a 10 B 6
kohm EOL resistor.

7 14 –
Terminals 5 to 10 — LON signaling circuit COM SHIELD
terminals 8 13 –
24 VDC
Be sure to observe polarity A 9 12 +

when wiring the LON. COM 1
B 10 11 +
5— “A” side of signaling B1901
circuit for COM 2 * POLARITY SHOWN IS FOR MONITORING CONDITION,

POLARITY IS REVERSED WHEN ACTIVATED.
6— “B” side of signaling NOTE:

TERMINALS 12 AND 13 ARE FOR MODULE POWER SUPPLY.
circuit for COM 2 TERMINALS 11 AND 14 ARE FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY.
JUMPERS JP1 AND JP2 MUST BE REMOVED IF AN AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED.
7 and 8 — s h i e l d
Figure 3-69—Wiring Configuration for Signal Audible Module
connections
9— “A” side of signaling

circuit for COM 1
10 — “B” side of signaling

circuit for COM 1
Terminals 11 to 14 — 24 vdc power input
Connect the module power

supply to terminals 12 and
13. If an auxiliary output
supply is used for powering
signaling devices, it should
be connected to terminals 11
and 14.
Jumpers
JP1
Terminals 13 and 14 are connected by jumper JP2 11 12 13 14
JP2
and terminals 11 and 12 are connected by jumper
JP1. These two jumpers (JP1 and JP2) must be cut if
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
an auxiliary output power supply is being used. (See
Figure 3-70) for jumper locations.
Address Setting
B1903
Set device network address. (See “Setting Device
Network Addresses” in this section.) Figure 3-70—Signal Audible Module Wiring Terminals and Jumpers
14.1 3-56 95-8533

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SETTING DEVICE NETWORK ADDRESSES BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Overview of Network Addresses

NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A2190
address. Addresses 1 to 4 are reserved for the
controller. Valid addresses for field devices are from
Figure 3-72—Address Switch for DCIO and Relay Module
5 to 250.
IMPORTANT
If the address is set to zero or an address above Example: for node No. 5, close rocker switches 1
250, the communication module will ignore the and 3 (binary values 1 + 4); for node No. 25, close
switch setting. rocker switches 1, 4 and 5 (binary values 1 + 8 + 16).
Duplicated addresses are not automatically detected. Note
Modules given the same address will use the number The field device sets the LON address only when
given and report to the controller using that address. power is applied to the device. Therefore, it is
A "Rogue Device" message will be displayed when important to set the switches before applying
two LON devices have duplicate addresses assigned power. If an address is ever changed, system
to them. The status word will show the latest update, power must be cycled before the new address
which could be from any of the reporting modules will take effect.
using that address.
After setting address switches, record the address
Setting Field Device Addresses number and device type on the “Address Identification
Chart” provided with this manual. Post the chart in a
Selection of the node address for field devices is convenient location near the Controller for future
done by setting rocker switches on an 8 switch “DIP reference.
Switch” within each device’s housing.
Note
Only the first eight of the 12 switches are used
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
for selecting the device address. Figure 3-73 is a simplified drawing of a typical EQP
system. This system includes an EQP Controller,
The address number is binary encoded with each DCIO and various LON field devices.
switch having a specific binary value with switch 1
being the LSB (Least Significant Bit). (See Figure
3-71) The device’s LON address is equal to the
added value of all closed rocker switches. All “Open”
switches are ignored.
NOTE
The address switches in the DCIO module and
relay module appear slightly different than those
in other devices. Refer to Figure 3-72.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
OPEN OPEN
BINARY
VALUE 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
LEAVE IN
OPEN POSITION
NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE OPEN = OFF
OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES CLOSED = ON
A1557
Figure 3-71—Field Device Address Switches for

ARM, SAM, DCU and IDC
14.1 3-57 95-8533

14.1
+ +
– –
– POWER –
+ DISTRIBUTION + X3301 / X5200 / X2200 / X9800
+ Flame Detectors
–
+ – + –
CONTROLLER EQ3700DCIO* EQ2100PSM EQ2200IDC EQ3720RM
P1 P1 P1
6 SHIELD 3 4 SHIELD 9 13 SHIELD 3 13 SHIELD 3 3 SHIELD 6
4 24 VDC – 2 5 24 VDC – 2 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 11 24 VDC – 1 11 24 VDC – 1 2 24 VDC – 5
3 24 VDC + 1 4 24 VDC + 1 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 12 24 VDC + 2 12 24 VDC + 2 1 24 VDC + 4

P7 P2
P2
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1
51 SHIELD 48 6 SHIELD 3 12 SHIELD 1 7 SHIELD 8 16 SHIELD 6 16 SHIELD 6 6 SHIELD 3
52 B 49 5 B 2 11 B 3 6 B 10 14 B 4 14 B 4 5 B 2
53 A 50 4 A 1 10 A 2 5 A 9 15 A 5 15 A 5 4 A 1
P6
SHUNT P3
C 45
C 1 N CIRCUIT 1 + 1
FAULT NO 46 P4 P3
B 2 CIRCUIT 1 – 2
NC 47 A + SUPPLY A AC LINE
P9 P8 3 CIRCUIT 2 + 3
B IN–/OUT+ B + –
CH 1
CH 5
GND 5 57 GND GND 54 24 VDC 4 H CIRCUIT 2 – 4
C COMMON C SUPPLY
RXD 2 58 RxD B 55
TXD 3 59 TxD A 56 A + SUPPLY A
3-58
DB-9 H N
P2 P3
CONNECTION B IN–/OUT+ B AC LINE
CH 6
CH 2
TO COM PORT 5 1+ 5+ 13
OF PC
6 1– 5– 14 C COMMON C
+ –
7 2+ 6+ 15
A + SUPPLY A 24 VDC
8 2– 6– 16 BATTERY
B IN–/OUT+ B
CH 3
CH 7
9 3+ 7+ 17 EQ24xxNE EQ22xxDCU PIRECL/OPECL EQ25xxARM EQ25xxSAM
10 3– 7– 18 C COMMON C
4 SHIELD 9 6 SHIELD 3
DIGITAL INPUTS
11 4+ 8+ 19
A + SUPPLY A
12 4– 8– 20 6 24 VDC – 7 13 24 VDC – 14 4 24 VDC – 1 13 24 VDC – 14 13 24 VDC – 14
B IN–/OUT+ B
CH 4
CH 8
P4 P5 5 24 VDC + 8 11 24 VDC + 12 5 24 VDC + 2 11 24 VDC + 12 11 24 VDC + 12
21 C C 33 C COMMON C
COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1 COM2 COM1
22 NO NO 34
RELAY 1
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
RELAY 5
12 1 7 8 12 9 7 8 7 8
23 NC NC 35
* LON AND POWER TERMINALS ALSO
24 C C 36 VALID FOR AIM, IPM, RM, EDIO. 11 B 3 6 B 10 11 B 8 6 B 10 6 B 10
SEE INDIVIDUAL DEVICE FOR
25 NO NO 37
CHANNEL TERMINALS.
RELAY 2
A A A A A
RELAY 6
10 2 5 9 10 7 5 9 5 9
26 NC NC 38
THE DEVICE’S CHASSIS GROUND
27 C C 39 TERMINAL SHOULD BE POINTWATCH
CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND. CALIBRATE 1 CALIBRATE 13 + 1 OUTPUT 1 + 1
28 NO NO 40
RELAY 3
4 TO 20 MA IN
RELAY 7
2 – 2 OUTPUT 1 – 2
29 NC NC 41
– 3 + 3 OUTPUT 2 + 3
30 C C 42 SENSOR
DUAL SOLENOIDS
SINGLE SOLENOID
POWER
31 NO NO 43 + 4 – 4 OUTPUT 2 – 4
RELAY 8
RELAY 4
C2100
32 NC NC 44
95-8533
Figure 3-73—A Typical System
Section 4 Enter chooses the menu item selected, and advances
the menu to the next options list. (See “Controller
Operation Menu Options“ in this section for additional
information.)
SYSTEM CONTROLLER Note

Pressing Enter while alarms are actively scrolling
PUSHBUTTONS returns the display to the Main Menu.
The Controller has seven pushbuttons (located on the Next allows the operator to scroll through options
front panel) for user interface. These pushbuttons listed within each menu. Each time the NEXT
allow the operator to interact with the Controller to pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
respond to alarms and system status conditions, up one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
access system status reports, and configure Controller this section for additional information)
time and date settings.
Previous allows the operator to scroll through options
The following paragraphs describe the function of listed within each menu. Each time the PREVIOUS
each pushbutton. Refer to Figure 4-1 for Controller pushbutton is pushed, the current options list indexes
pushbutton locations. down one list item. (See “Controller Menu Options” in
this section for additional information)
Cancel cancels the selected command, and returns
the menu to the last option list displayed. Reset resets all controller latched outputs that are no
longer active.
Acknowledge silences the internal beeper.
Silence turns on the Silence LED and sets Silence

status in user logic.
DET-TRONICS
®

Figure 4-1—EQP Controller Pushbutton Locations
14.1 4-1 95-8533

CONTROLLER STATUS INDICATORS CONTROLLER MENU OPTIONS
System status is visually displayed on the Controller The Controller is designed to display system status
in two ways — through the use of a Text Display (see and device related information. The following
Figure 4-2), and through colored LED’s (see Table paragraphs describe how to move around within the
4-1). The following paragraphs describe these controller’s menu structure to access this information
indicators and the function of each. and perform minor system settings (see Figure 4-3).
Note
TEXT DISPLAY
During normal operation (no alarms or trouble
The Controller uses a text based display to show conditions occurring), the display scrolls current
current system status, active Alarms and Faults. system time and date.
When an alarm or trouble condition occurs, the Main Menu displays a list of options to access
display scrolls a detailed message of the condition, information types available for display through the
including tag number, condition (alarm, trouble, Controller. This list also includes access to options
supervisory etc.) and time/date. If multiple alarms or used to set system date and time, and diagnostics
trouble conditions exist, the display scrolls through all options.
active status conditions until they go inactive and are
reset using the controller pushbutton.
DET-TRONICS
®

Figure 4-2—EQP Controller Message Display and System Status Indicator Location
Table 4-1—EQP Controller LED System Status Indicators

LED Function Status
Green Power On when power is applied.
Red Fire Alarm On (latched) when any fire alarm is active (Fire detected).
Amber Trouble On (latched) when a fault is detected in the system. (Indicates "Trouble" relay state.)
Amber Ack On when the Acknowledge button is pressed.
Amber Silence On when Silence pushbutton is pressed.
Amber Inhibit On when any input channel is inhibited.
Amber Out Inhibit On when any output is inhibited.
Red High Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the High gas alarm value.
Red Low Gas On (latched) when any gas detector is at or above the Low gas alarm value.
Amber Supr On (latched) when any Supervisory input is active.
Amber LON Fault On when a LON fault is detected (open or short).
Amber Contrl Fault On when a processor fault occurs.
14.1 4-2 95-8533

Marque Display Alarm
Auto Scrolling Alarm
Enter / Cancel
Display Current Time/Date Screen
(no active alarms)
Display Alarms
Enter
Display Alarms Screen
Next
Enter Prev
Alarm Types
Cancel Display Devices*
Next Fire
Reset
Prev Supervisory
Device Tagname Pressing the ack
Trouble switch acknowledges
Add: xxx Device Type
Low Gas the visible alarm.
Fault/ No Fault
High Gas
Device dependent info Current
Inhibit
Output Inhibit Input State
Main Menu
Device Tagnames*
Display Alarms Alarm Type Off/On Visible if the
Display Devices Tag Name for Device n
alarm was
Previous
Tag Name
Next
Device Tagnames Enter Tag Name for Device n

Set Time & Date Cancel Alarm Description acknowledged
Tag Name for Device n
Serial Ports Time and Date ack
Diagnostics
Redundancy Info
Set Time and Date
Next and Previous buttons are used to scroll the lists.
Edit Time/Date The Enter button is used to navigate to the next level.
The Cancel button is used to back out a level.
Serial Ports*
Configuration Port
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
Serial Port 3 * Submenus with more detailed information are available.
Serial Port 4
Redundancy Port
Diagnostics
Lamp Test – Enter
Redundancy Info
Fault:
Lst Flt:
Cntr Mode:
My Config:
Redun Mem:
HSSL Status:
Version Match:
Parser:
Comm Ack:
Lon Comm:
Msg Error:
--Master Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
--Standby Errors--
Program Flow:
LON A Inf:
LON B Inf:
User Logic CS:
App CS:
User Logic:
Config:
Power 1:
Power 2:
Option Bd:
Figure 4-3—EQP Controller Message Display Menu Outline
14.1 4-3 95-8533

Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons allows
Main Menu cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
pushbutton will return the display to the Main Menu.
>Display Alarms
Display Devices DEVICE TAG NAMES displays device tag name
Device Tagnames information for all devices on the LON loop.
Moving within the Main Menu is done by using the Device Tagnames
NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons located on the
controller’s front panel. The menu options will scroll
Controller
upward (NEXT Pushbutton) or downward (Previous Z398-80 X
Pushbutton) while the Main Menu name remains
stationary. When the desired menu option is selected
by the “>” indicator, the ENTER pushbutton is pressed
to advance the menu display to the desired Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
information set. cycling through devices. Pressing the CANCEL
Note
Pressing the CANCEL pushbutton from within S et T ime and Date p ro v i d e s a c c e s s t o
any sub-menu returns the display to the Main configuration controls for system clock and date
Menu. The display will also return to the Main settings.
Menu if left unattended for a period of 20
minutes. If an alarm or trouble condition is
present after 20 minutes, the display will change
to the existing Alarm or Trouble message. Set Time & Date
DISPLAY ALARMS displays a list of existing Alarms 11:20:52
and Trouble conditions. Moving within this menu is Jul 29 / 2002
done by using the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons.
Note
When the Set Time and Date menu opens, the
Alarm Type Off/On current hour will flash.
Tag Name
Alarm Description To move within this menu, press the ENTER
pushbutton until the desired property is flashing. To
Time & Date ack set the desired property value, press the NEXT
Pushbutton to increase or PREVIOUS Pushbutton to
decrease the value. When the desired value is
Note displayed, press the ENTER pushbutton. This will
Multiple alarm information can be viewed by advance the menu to the next property and it will
pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbuttons. flash. When all desired properties have been entered,
Pressing CANCEL will return the menu to the press the ENTER pushbutton until the message “Press
DISPLAY ALARMS menu. ENTER to Save” is displayed. When the ENTER
pushbutton is pressed, the settings are saved and the
menu changes back to the MAIN MENU.
DISPLAY DEVICES displays device information on all
devices on the LON loop. Device tag name, type, and
node address are displayed.
Z398-63 U / I
Add:63 UV / IR Detect
No Fault
14.1 4-4 95-8533

SERIAL PORTS displays port information on all Cntr Mode
available ports.
Indicates whether the controller is in master or
standby mode.
Serial Ports My Config

Configuration Port Indicates whether the controller is the primary or
Serial Port 1 secondary controller.
Serial Port 2
Redun Mem
Displays how long it takes to transfer the local and
Pressing the NEXT or PREVIOUS pushbutton allows
global memory between controllers.
cycling through ports. Pressing the CANCEL
HSSL Status
DIAGNOSTICS displays information for factory field
An error is generated when a problem is detected on
service.
the high-speed communication link between
controllers. This fault is annunciated when the
standby controller is offline.
Diagnostics
Lamp Test -Enter- Version Match
Display: Traditional
To ensure proper redundant operation, the firmware
HW Version: 2 versions of redundant controllers must match. This
error is set when a mismatch is detected. Consult the
factory for firmware upgrades.
Redundancy Info displays the current status of all
redundancy related faults. It can be used to monitor SIL Rating
the health of the master and standby controllers. It
To ensure proper redundant operation, the SIL rating
can also be used for diagnostic purposes.
of redundant controllers must match. An error is
indicated if a SIL controller is paired with a non‑SIL
Redundancy faults originate from three general areas:
rated controller. Consult the factory for details.
• Self detected internal failures of the master
controller
Parser
• Inter-controller communications
As the master controller configures a standby
• A failure in the standby controller. controller, configuration information is extracted from
non-volatile memory and checked for errors.
Any redundancy fault is annunciated by the master
controller, and the redundancy fault code of the
Comm Ack
highest priority fault is displayed. The controller also
provides a diagnostic menu for more detailed Critical information is exchanged between controllers
information on the source of a redundancy problem. on the HSSL using acknowledged messages. The
All redundancy related faults must be cleared to master sends data packets that contain an embedded
insure proper redundancy operation. CRC and a transaction number. The standby
validates the message by calculating and comparing
the CRC values. If the CRC is correct the standby
Fault
saves the data and returns an acknowledge message
Displays the current redundancy fault. with the transaction number. If an acknowledge
message with the proper transaction number is not
received by the master within the allotted time the
Lst Flt
message is resent. When all retries are used the
Displays the last redundancy fault that occurred. acknowledge error is indicted and acknowledged
communication is terminated.
14.1 4-5 95-8533

Lon Comm Config
Redundant controllers exchange information across This fault is annunciated when a controller has not
the LON network. This is primarily done to prevent been configured or the configuration information has
both controllers from becoming the master in the been corrupted.
event that the HSSL fails. The fault is annunciated
when a controller fails to receive any information from
Power 1
the other controller.
Displays the power 1 status on the standby controller.
Msg Error
Power 2
If the standby controller receives a message from the
master that has the correct CRC but invalid data an Displays the power 2 status on the standby controller.
error message is returned. This master will indicate
the error with this fault.
Option Bd
Indicates whether there is a fault on the ControlNet
Program Flow
option board of the standby controller.
Program flow checking ensures that essential
functions execute in the correct sequence. If any
CONTROLLER AUDIBLE ALARM
functions don’t execute properly, or execute in the
wrong order, the program flow error is set and control The Controller features an internal audible alarm for
is transferred to the standby controller. local system status notification (see Table 4-2 and
Figure 4-4). When the system is operating in the
normal mode (no Alarm or Fault conditions occurring),
LON A/B Inf
the alarm is silent (off). If an event (any alarm or
Controllers utilize neuron co-processors to interface trouble condition) occurs, the alarm will remain active
with the field device network. If an error is detected in until it is acknowledged by pressing the Acknowledge
the operation of the co-processor, a LON interface pushbutton or reset by pressing the Reset pushbutton
fault is annunciated. on the Controller front panel.
User Logic CS
Controllers continually conduct a checksum test of the Table 4-2—EQP Controller Alarm Tone Patterns
user logic program to ensure that the data remains
unchanged. A user checksum fault is annunciated if Priority Controller Tone Tone Pattern
the result is incorrect.
1 Fire Alarm Temporal
App CS 2 Supervisory Supervisory

When the controller firmware is generated a checksum 3 Trouble Trouble
of the program is calculated and saved in memory.
Each controller is continually conducting a checksum 4 High Gas Gas
test of the program to ensure that the data remains
unchanged. The application checksum fault is 5 Low Gas Gas
annunciated if the result is incorrect. 6 Normal Off
User Logic
Many checks are conducted while the controller
interprets and executes the user program. The user
logic error is generated if invalid or out of range data
is detected.
14.1 4-6 95-8533

0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 1.5 SEC SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DURING A
CONFIGURATION DATA DOWNLOAD
FIRE
ALARM During a configuration download, the controller
receives configuration data that is stored into flash
0.1 SEC 0.1 SEC
memory. During the download process, the controller
2.0 SEC halts normal operation and resets a number of
SUPERVISORY
controller functions. Items affected and displayed
during a configuration data download are listed in the
0.5 SEC following steps:
5.0 SEC
1. Halt the static logic and user logic programs.
TROUBLE
0.5 SEC 0.5 SEC 3.0 SEC 2. Ignore field device LON communications.
However, the controller continues to generate the
HIGH/LOW LON heartbeat.
GAS
B1855
3. Silence the Controller’s audible annunciator.
Figure 4-4—Tone Pattern for Controller Buzzer
4. Initiate a Trouble condition that is signaled by the
amber Trouble LED and relay.
5. Clear all Alarm and Fault events.

Note
6. De-energize all 8 Controller relays.
If multiple alarms are present, “Acknowledging”
will silence the audible alarms.
7. Ignore Modbus communication.
CONTROLNET STATUS INDICATORS

(Optional)
The optional ControlNet status indicator LEDs function
as follows: (see Table 4-3)
Steady - The indicator is on continuously in the
defined state.
Alternating - The two indicators alternate between the
two defined states at the same time (applies to both
indicators viewed together). The two indicators are
always in opposite states, out of phase.
Flashing - The indicator alternates between the two
defined states (applies to each indicator viewed
independent of the other). If both indicators are
flashing, they must flash together, in phase.
14.1 4-7 95-8533

Table 4-3—Status of ControlNet LED Indicators
A and B Cause Action

Off No power None or power up.
Steady red Faulted unit Cycle power.
If fault persists, contact the factory.
Alternating red/green Self-test None
Alternating red/off Incorrect node configuration Check network address and other ControlNet configuration
parameters.
A or B Cause Action
Off Channel disabled Program network for redundant media, if required.
Steady green Normal operation None
Flashing green/off Temporary errors None; unit will self-correct.
Listen only Cycle power.
Flashing red/off Media fault Check media for broken cables, loose connectors,
missing terminators, etc.
No other nodes present on network Add other nodes to the network.
Flashing red/green Incorrect network configuration Cycle power or reset unit.
If fault persists, contact the factory.
8. ControlNet communication continues. 12. Initialized the ControlNet option board with new
parameters.
9. Text display’s first line indicates "*** Program
Mode ***" 13. Enable static logic and user logic programs to
operate. The first scan program is run first.
10. Text display’s third line displays download status.
14. Accept field device LON communications.
a) "Config Download" indicates the serial transfer
into memory from the PC to the Controller. 15. Poll the device type variable from LON field
devices.
b) "Erasing Flash" indicates that the controller is
electronically erasing the contents of the Flash 16. Configure LON field devices.
memory.
17. Clear the Trouble condition.
c) "Writing to Flash" indicates that configuration
data stored in memory is being written down 18. Text display shows a normal operation marquee
into Flash memory. message.
d) "Flash Lock" indicates that the controller is a) Text display’s first line indicates "Det-Tronics
locking the configuration data into the Flash Eagle Quantum Premier".
memory.
b) Text display’s third line displays time (24 hour
Caution format) and date (month day/year).
The controller’s configuration data will be
corrupted if power is removed during a note
download. Contact the factory if this occurs. Depending on the condition of the LON devices,
faults may persist for a number of minutes.
11. Initialize the RS-485 and configuration serial ports
with new parameters.
14.1 4-8 95-8533

CONTROLLER REDUNDANCY 6. If there are no faults present, the primary controller
defaults to the master controller and the
Pushbuttons secondary controller defaults to the standby
controller.
The pushbuttons are active on the master controller
and inactive on the standby controller.
7. The master controller executes user logic and
communicates with the connected LON devices.
Controller Status Indicators
8. The standby controller indicates that it is in
The status indicators are active on the master
standby mode and monitors the master controller.
controller. All LEDs except the power LED are off and
the trouble relay is in the no trouble state.
9. The master and standby controller go through a
synchronization process.
Controller Relay Operation
10. The power-up sequence is complete.
The controller relays are fully functional on the master
controller and the standby controller.
Synchronization
Text Display When a master controller detects a standby controller
on the HSSL, it performs the following synchronization
The text display on the master controller is fully
process:
functional as explained in the previous section. The
text display on the standby controller reads **Standby
1. Compare controller firmware versions and SIL
Mode**, Ready.
rating. If they are not an exact match, the process
stops and a fault is generated. Consult the
Controller Menu Options factory for details.
The menu options are active on the master controller
2. Standby controller indicates the synchronization
and inactive on the standby controller.
steps.
ControlNet Status Indicators 3. Compare the user application programs. If there

is a mis-match, the master will configure the
The ControlNet status indicators are active on the
standby controller via the HSSL.
master and standby controller. See Table 4-3 for
details.
4. Initiate the data synchronization process.
Power-up Sequence 5. Transfer the status of device inhibits and device

removes.
The power-up sequence for a redundant controller
pair is as follows:
6. Transfer the complete alarm list, including alarm
history.
1. Make sure the LON and HSSL are connected
correctly.
7. Transfer the real time clock (RTC) value.
2. Apply power to both controllers.
8. Copy the local and global memory to the standby
controller.
3. Controllers go through their boot-up routine.
9. Synchronization is complete and the standby
4. The controller that is connected with the primary
controller indicates “Ready”.
end of the HSSL is identified as the primary
controller and is assigned address 1.
5. The controller that is connected with the

secondary end of the HSSL is assigned address
2.
14.1 4-9 95-8533

Sequence of Events During a Configuration Automatic Switchover
Download
An automatic transfer will be initiated if the master
controller goes into an error (self detected internal
warning controller failure, program flow error in the controller,
The system is inactive and not executing logic/ user logic checksum error or application checksum
alarm functions during a program download (in error). An automatic switchover executes the following
b o t h s i n g l e a n d re d u n d a n t c o n t ro l l e r sequence:
configurations).
1. Check that the standby controller is online by
When downloading a new configuration to the master verifying that HSSL communication is good and
controller, the following sequence is executed: there are no internal faults in the standby
controller.
1. The S3 software must be connected to the master
controller. 2. Verify that the synchronization process is
complete.
2. Alter the configuration and execute the download
command from S3. 3. The master requests the standby to take control.
3. The master controller goes into ‘Program’ mode 4. The standby takes control and becomes the
and passes mastership to the standby controller. master.
4. The updated configuration file is loaded into the

controller. Replacing a Faulty Controller
If the master controller fails and the standby controller
5. The controllers are automatically forced to switch is healthy, an automatic switchover will occur. To
over. replace the failed controller, perform the following
steps:
6. The master controller puts the standby controller
into ‘Program’ mode and downloads the 1. Remove power. Disconnect plugs and remove
configuration. the failed controller.
7. The controller indicates “Device Download Active” 2. Mount the new controller.
until the LON devices have been successfully
updated. 3. Connect the LON to the new controller.
8. The configuration download is now complete. 4. Connect the HSSL.
Manual Switchover 5. Connect any other I/O used.
The user can request a manual switchover from an 6. Apply power to the controller.
externally wired switch. The request executes the
following sequence: 7. A controller synchronization occurs and the new
controller is configured and indicates “Ready” as
1. Verify that HSSL communication is good and there the standby controller.
are no internal faults in the standby controller.
8. If preferred, perform a manual switchover to return
2. Verify that the synchronization process is the primary controller to the master status.
complete.
3. The master requests the standby to take control.
4. The standby takes control and becomes the

master.
5. The controller indicates “Device Download Active”

until the LON devices have been successfully
updated.
14.1 4-10 95-8533

ENHANCED DISCRETE I/O MODULE
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs
The EDIO Module (see Figure 4-5) has 18 LED status

indicators, two for the device and two for each
channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Tables
4-4 and 4-5 for a description of the LED indicators.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-5—EDIO Module Status Indicator Location
EDIO module power-up sequence illuminates the

LEDs for the device and all of its channels. First the
power and fault LEDs are illuminated, indicating that
the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are Table 4-4—EDIO Module - Device Status Indicators
illuminated in the following sequences:
LED Device Status
• Sequentially each channel active red LED is
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing Green On when power is present.
through channel 8. Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated, problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the
same manner as the channel active red LEDs.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the EDIO Table 4-5—EDIO Module - Channel Status Indicators
module displays the device’s LON address by
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip LED Channel Status
switches 1 though 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON closed or the output circuit is active.
position, the channel active red LED will be Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
illuminated. The address is displayed for two present or channel is not properly configured.
seconds. Steady indicates a channel fault.
Once the address has been displayed, the device’s

fault LED will turn off.
After the power-up sequence, the device will either

display an unconfigured state or normal operation
state. In the unconfigured state, the channel fault
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all
channels.
14.1 4-11 95-8533

8 CHANNEL DCIO MODULE
The DCIO Module (see Figure 4-6) has 18 LED status

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-6—DCIO Module Status Indicator Location
DCIO module power-up sequence illuminates the

the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are
Table 4-6—DCIO Module - Device Status Indicators
LED Device Status
channel 8.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the DCIO Table 4-7—DCIO Module - Channel Status Indicators
switches 1 though 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON closed or the output circuit is active.
seconds. Steady indicates a channel fault.


channels.
14.1 4-12 95-8533

8 CHANNEL RELAY MODULE
The Relay Module (see Figure 4-7) has 18 LED status

POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-7—Relay Module Status Indicator Location
Relay module power-up sequence illuminates the

the device is in a power-up mode. Next the LEDs are Table 4-8—Relay Module - Device Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green On when power is present.
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
channel 8.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the relay Table 4-9—Relay Module - Channel Status Indicators
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1 Red When On steady indicates the output circuit is
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON active.
seconds.


channels.
14.1 4-13 95-8533

ANALOG INPUT MODULE STATUS INDICATOR LEDs
The Analog Input Module (see Figure 4-8) has 18 LED

status indicators, two for the device and two for each
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power. Figure 4-8—Analog Input Module Status Indicator Location
The Analog Input Module power-up sequence

illuminates the LEDs for the device and all of its
channels. First the power and fault LEDs are
illuminated, indicating that the device is in a power-up
mode. Next the LEDs are illuminated in the following
Table 4-10—Analog Input Module - Device Status Indicators
sequences:
LED Device Status
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
problem.
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
Note
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through
Blinks one time at power-up.
channel 8.
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the analog

input module displays the device’s LON address by Table 4-11—Analog Input Module - Channel Status Indicators
illuminating the channel active red LED. LON dip
switches 1 through 8 will be displayed on channels 1 LED Channel Status
through 8. When a dip switch is set to the ON Red When Blinking indicates a low alarm.
position, the channel active red LED will be When On Steady indicates a high alarm.
illuminated. The address is displayed for two Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
seconds. present or channel is not properly configured. On
steady indicates out of range condition.

channels.
14.1 4-14 95-8533

INTELLIGENT PROTECTION MODULE Table 4-12—Intelligent Protection Module - Device Status Indicators
LED Device Status

The Intelligent Protection Module (see Figure 4-9) has
18 LED status indicators, two for the device and two Green On when power is present.
for each channel, located on the front panel. Refer to Amber When On steady indicates device is disabled or
Tables 4-12 and 4-13 for a description of the LED must be replaced. Possible Watchdog Timer
indicators. problem.
Note
Blinks one time at power-up.
POWER-UP SEQUENCE
Set the module address switch prior to applying power.
Table 4-13—Intelligent Protection Module - Channel Status Indicators
The Intelligent Protection Module power-up sequence LED Channel Status
illuminates the LEDs for the device and all of its
Red When On steady indicates the input circuit is
channels. First the power and fault LEDs are closed or the output circuit is active.
illuminated, indicating that the device is in a power-up
Amber When Blinking indicates a low power condition is
mode. Next the LEDs are illuminated in the following present or channel is not properly configured.
sequences: Steady indicates a channel fault.
illuminated, starting with channel 1 and continuing
through channel 8.
• When the red LED for channel 8 is illuminated,
sequentially each channel active red LED is turned
off, starting with channel 1 and continuing through EMBEDDED LOGIC – PURPOSE
channel 8.
The IPM employs an “Embedded logic” feature that
• Next, the channel fault amber LEDs are tested in the when activated during module configuration can
same manner as the channel active red LEDs. ensure a local level of protection for the hazard during
times where communication with the EQP Controller is
When all the LEDs have been illuminated, the lost or the EQP Controller is offline for repair or
intelligent protection module displays the device’s replacement.
LON address by illuminating the channel active red
LED. LON dip switches 1 through 8 will be displayed
on channels 1 through 8. When a dip switch is set to EMBEDDED LOGIC – CONTROL TRANSFER
the ON position, the channel active red LED will be SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
illuminated. The address is displayed for two A user configurable selection is provided to choose
seconds. the operational mode of the IPM. Three modes are
provided, two of which utilize the embedded logic
Once the address has been displayed, the device’s feature.
If enabled, the embedded logic is armed at all times
After the power-up sequence, the device will either but control of the outputs depends on the selected
display an unconfigured state or normal operation mode.
amber LEDs flash ON and OFF at the same rate for all In the “back-up mode” control of the IPM outputs
channels. transfers to the IPM’s embedded logic in the event of
an IPM diagnosed loss of communications between
STATUS INDICATOR LEDs itself and the EQP Controller.
A n I P M d i a g n o s e d re s u m p t i o n o f n o r m a l
communications with the Controller will cause control
of the IPM outputs to transfer back to the Controller
unless a release sequence has been initiated and is
not yet complete.
Figure 4-9—Intelligent Protection Module Status Indicator Location
14.1 4-15 95-8533

NOTE Manual Release Action – Delayed or Not Delayed:
Once a release sequence has been initiated A software selection allows the Manual Release input
within the embedded logic, the sequence will of the module, channel 2, to be delayed or not
continue until it is complete. delayed. If not delayed, release is immediate. If
delayed, the signal will utilize the time delay selected
When the embedded logic sequence is complete, a for the release circuits but with a 30-second
“Manual Reset Required” status condition will be maximum.
reported by the IPM. User logic within the EQP
Controller must be utilized to send a “Reset” Release Circuit Delay Selection: A time delay is
command to the IPM that will reset all timers, latches, available from when the inputs (channels 2, 4 or 5) go
etc. to their normal state. active until the releasing outputs (channels 7 and 8)
go active. The bell output (channel 6) is activated
If a Detector Electronics S3 Operator Interface Station immediately when an input becomes active. The time
(OIS) is attached to the EQP Controller, the point delay selection choices are listed below:
display for the IPM can be used to send a reset
0 Second
command.
10 Seconds
20 Seconds
NOTE
30 Seconds
The IPM will not accept a reset command if the
40 Seconds
“Manual Release” input is in the “alarm” state.
50 Seconds
60 Seconds
EMBEDDED LOGIC – S3 CONFIGURABLE
OPTIONS NOTE
Manual release is limited to 30 seconds, even if
The IPM has various configurable options, selected
40, 50 or 60 seconds time delay is selected.
during node configuration in the S 3 software
package.
Abort Mode Selection: The IPM abort input, channel
1, is software configurable to use any one of three
Embedded Logic Selection: The IPM has 3
modes of operation. These three modes operate as
operation modes, Controller Only, Back-up Mode,
follows:
Embedded Only.
Mode 1: Upon activation, the delay timer will count
Controller Only: In this mode the I/O of the IPM will
down to and hold at 10 seconds; upon release,
be controlled from the EQP Controller only and
timer will continue to count down to zero. Only this
embedded logic is inactive.
mode complies with UL 864.
Back-up Mode: (The default selection) the IPM I/O is
Mode 2: Upon activation the delay timer will reset
normally controlled by the EQP Controller but utilizes
to its initial value and on release will continue
embedded logic in accordance with the “Control
counting down to zero.
Transfer Sequence Description” to control its I/O
under certain circumstances.
IRI Mode: Functions similar to “Mode 1” except the
abort will only function if activated prior to a second
Embedded Only: In this mode the IPM continuously
alarm.
operates from its embedded logic. The status of all
IPM I/O is available to the EQP Controller but control
Signaling Circuit Configuration – Bell Circuit
of the outputs are not; however, controller and S3
(SAM), Channel 6: This output channel can be
reset commands are accepted.
software selected to any standard EQP Signal Audible
Module (SAM) configuration. In a cross-zoned mode,
Detection Style – Single or Cross Zoned: A
selections are as follows:
software selection allows either “1 zone release” or “2
zone release” (cross-zoned) operation.
One Zone Mode: The signaling circuit can be
configured to any standard SAM selection.
Two Zone Mode: In this mode the user must make

two selections. A standard SAM selection for when a
single detection circuit is in alarm and another
selection for when both detection circuits are in alarm.
14.1 4-16 95-8533

EMBEDDED LOGIC – OPERATION Manual Alarm Condition – Two Zone Mode (cross
zoned):
Supervisory Condition: The supervisory input on
channel 3 has no embedded logic function and is
Upon receipt of a manual alarm from Channel 2:
passed on as information only to the EQP Controller
where it is displayed as a supervisory fault.
Signal circuit devices are activated per the software
selected signaling circuit configuration, two zone
Alarm Condition - Single Zone Mode: Upon receipt
mode, two zones in alarm, as described earlier –
of an alarm from an activated detector on IPM channel
Bell Circuit Channel 6.
4 or 5 OR activation of the manual station, channel 2:
Programmed release time delay activated.
selected signaling circuit configuration described
Release output(s) activated.
earlier – Bell Circuit Channel 6.
Module Reset: After completion of the release
output(s) timer, if no alarm condition is present on
channel 2 (Manual Release) then the module can be
reset via soft command on the S3 Module Point
Display or if the EQP Controller is offline, by holding
Operation of Abort: Discharge is aborted ONLY
the Abort input, Channel 1, active momentarily.
when alarm is from a detector, and abort is
activated during programmed release time delay.
When reset, the IPM will de-energize the two detector
Abort sequence is dependent on the abort mode
circuits, channels 4 and 5, for two seconds to reset
selection as described earlier.
the smoke detectors. Any latched outputs will also be
reset.
Alarm Condition – Two Zone Mode (cross zoned):
Upon receipt of an alarm from one activated detector
Release Outputs: When commanded to release, the
in one zone.
release output(s) will energize for the configured time
and then de-energize.
mode, one zone in alarm, as described earlier –
Second Alarm Condition: Upon receipt of an alarm

from a second activated detector in the other zone.

mode, two zones in alarm, as described earlier –
14.1 4-17 95-8533

EQ21xxPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
The power supply monitor (see Figure 4-10) has three The ground fault monitor (see Figure 4-11) has three
LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device LEDs used to provide a visual indication of device
status: status:
+ GND FLT LED

+ +
+ + 1
– GND FLT LED

+
+ +
+
+
1 + +
+ +
+
+
1
AMBER LED
PWR LED
+
RED LED
GREEN LED
Figure 4-10—EQ21xxPSM Status Indicator Location

A2243
Table 4-14—Power Supply Monitor Status Indicators Figure 4-11—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicator Location
LED Device Status

Green When On indicates power is supplied to device.
Table 4-15—Ground Fault Monitor Status Indicators
Red When Flashing indicates an alarm or fault
condition is present. LED Device Status
Amber When on indicates device is disabled. Module
+ GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “+”
must be replaced.
ground fault.
– GND FLT LED Indicates Amber in the presence of a “–”

ground fault.
POWER LED Indicates Green when the unit is

powered.
note
The Ground Fault Monitor LED will respond
immediately to a ground fault condition. The
relay contact requires the condition to exist for 10
seconds before it activates.
14.1 4-18 95-8533

EQ22xxIDC SERIES INITIATING EQ22xxDCU AND EQ22xxDCUEX
DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNITS
The IDC has three LEDs (located at the center of the The DCUs have three LEDs to provide a visual
IDC communication module circuit board) to provide indication of device status. They are visible through
a visual indication of device status. the window on the enclosure cover.
Note NOTE
The Initiating Device Circuit Ground Fault Monitor If the communication module has not been
responds to the presence of a ground fault within configured, the red LED blinks at a 4 Hz rate.
the power circuitry. It provides a supervised dry
contact input and ground fault monitoring NOTE
circuitry for indicating a power supply trouble The amber LED is provided for factory diagnostic
condition. purposes and is not used in the system.
Illumination of the amber LED normally indicates
NOTE a fa i l u re i n t h e c o m m u n i c a t i o n c h i p .
A blinking red LED on an IDCSC indicates Replacement of the communication module
trouble such as a wiring fault (open or short circuit board is required.
circuit) or not configured.
Table 4-16—Initiating Device Circuit Status Indicators Table 4-17—DCU Status Indicators
LED Device status Device Status LED Status
Green When On indicates device has power. Power-up Pulsed at a rate of 0.5 Hz
Calibration Pulsed at a rate of 1 Hz or on

steady
Red When On indicates an Alarm or Fault condition is Fault Pulsed at a rate of 4 Hz
present.
On steady = One of the inputs is active. Alarm On steady
Blinking = Fault condition such as an open
input circuit or not configured.
Amber When On indicates a device is disabled. Module must
be replaced.
14.1 4-19 95-8533

EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
The EQ25xxARM has three LEDs to indicate device The EQ25xxSAM has three LEDs to indicate device
status. They are located at the center of the circuit status. They are located at the center of the circuit
board. board.
Table 4-19—Signal Audible Module Status Indicators

Table 4-18—Agent Release Module Status Indicators
LED Device Status
LED Device Status Green When On indicates device has power.
Green When On indicates device has power.
Red When On steady indicates an Active condition exists.
Red When On steady indicates an output is
activated. When Blinking indicates a Trouble condition exists.
When Blinking at a 4 Hz rate with the LED on
50%, off 50% of the time indicates a local
trouble condition such as an open output Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuit or low solenoid supply voltage. circuitry. Module replacement is required.

5%, off 95% of the time indicates an isolate
condition.

95%, off 5% of the time indicates release and
isolate. EQ24xxNE Network Extender
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the
electronic circuitry. Module replacement is The EQ24xxNE has three LEDs (one green, two
required. amber) for indicating device status.
Table 4-20—Network Extender Status Indicators
LED Device Status
Green When On indicates device has power.
Flashes to indicate messages are being transferred
over the LON.
Amber When On indicates a malfunction in the electronic
circuitry. Module replacement is required.
Note
When a network extender has an internal
fault, the message display will only indicate
that there is a LON fault condition existing
somewhere on the LON.
14.1 4-20 95-8533

SYSTEM STARTUP Redundant Controller
The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed,

PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly
terminated and insulated.
General
Power wiring is installed and power source is
Insulate all shields to prevent shorts to device housing operational.
or to any other conductor.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth
Place alarm/release output in “Bypass/Isolate” when ground.
servicing devices.
The HSSL cable is connected between the two
Maintain a log book containing the type and serial controllers.
numbers of devices as well as the location and date
of installation.
EDIO/DCIO Module
Maintain a log of maintenance activities.
Verify correct address setting.
Observe normal precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices. Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
LON
Relay Module
Rocker switches for each LON device must be set to
the desired address prior to power-up.
Test the loop with no power applied. DC resistance
Check for correct output connections.
should be equal on A and B.
Check polarity on A and B (no rolls). COM 1 connects
Analog Input Module
to COM 2; COM 2 connects to COM 1. A connects
to A and B to B.
Measure voltage. A to chassis ground measures
Check for correct input connections.
approximately +7.5 vdc. B to ground measures
approximately –7.5 vdc. Check each channel with a loop current input.
Measure signal (400 mv P-P min.). (Use oscilloscope
if possible). Intelligent Protection Module
Check fault tolerance by introducing a short.
Check for correct input/output connections.
Controller
The I/O and LON wiring is correctly installed, Power Supplies and Power Monitors
observing polarity. All cable shields are properly
terminated and insulated. Verify all earth ground connections as specified in the
wiring instructions.
Power wiring is installed and power source is
operational. Verify correct ac power to supply.
Chassis ground stud must be connected to earth Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
ground. are receiving power.
Check power trouble indicator by introducing an open
to the battery.
14.1 4-21 95-8533

Ground Fault Monitor GENERAL START-UP PROCEDURES
1. Output loads that are controlled by the system
Verify earth ground connections as specified in the
should be secured (remove power from all output
wiring instructions.
devices) to prevent actuation.
Check power distribution to ensure that all devices
are receiving power. 2. Check all system wiring for proper connection.
3. Inspect all devices to verify that they have not

DCUs
been physically damaged in shipment.
4. Apply power to the system.
Check modules for correct orientation.
NOTE
Check for the presence of contaminants or poisoning
To prevent the network modules from going into
agents.
a fault isolation condition, apply power to the
Device should be oriented with the sensor pointing EQP Controller prior to applying power to the
down. network devices.
5. Program the system for the desired operation

IDCs
using Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3).
Download configuration data to all devices.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors. NOTE
After system configuration has been completed,
the entire system should be tested for proper
ARMs
operation to ensure that configuration was
performed properly.
Check jumpers. 6. Calibrate the sensors.
7. Ensure that all trouble and alarm conditions have

SAMs
been cleared and the EQP Controller is reset, then
remove mechanical blocking devices (if used)
and restore power to the output loads.
Check signal circuits for correct polarity.
Check for correct installation of EOL resistors.
Check jumpers.
14.1 4-22 95-8533

START-UP PROCEDURE FOR CONTROLLER STARTUP PROCEDURE for EDIO MODULE
The Controller is powered-up when the Power Supply
Configuration
is turned on. When the Power Supply has been
powered-up, verify power at the Controller by verifying The EDIO Module is an eight-channel device. Each
that the Green LED indicator is on. This indicator is channel is capable of being configured as an input or
located on the front of the Controller. output, independent of any other channel.
To verify that the Controller is powered-up and Note

operating properly, ensure that: The module is configured using Det-Tronics
Safety System Software.
1. When power is first applied, all LEDs are on. The
ACK LED flashes while the memory test is
Activation Time
running. When initialization is complete, only the
green power LED remains lit. Timers are made available for output circuits only.
Timers are used primarily to set the timing of output
2. The serial link indicators if active continuously release in a suppression system. Timers provide a
flash. pulse timed output for the time period specified in the
configuration of the channel. The channel output
3. The Text display runs an initialization routine. goes active when commanded by the system logic
When initialization is complete and if all alarms and remains on until the timer expires.
and trouble conditions are cleared, the text
display shows the current time and date. If the
Static Logic Mode
controller has been unpowered for more than 12
hours, the time and date may have to be set. If Each input channel can be configured as a Fire
an alarm or trouble condition exists, it will be Alarm, Trouble, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm,
displayed until the condition is corrected and the Supervisory, or Other type of channel, independent of
Reset button is pressed. any other channel configuration. The type selected
determines the logic the system uses to configure
If the controller has not been software configured, Indicators, Alarms and Messages.
unconfigured devices will be displayed.
Configuration must be done using S3 Safety For example: When an input is selected as Fire type,
System Software before proceeding. the Fire LED on the Controller and Audible alarm will
automatically actuate when that input channel is
4. The LEDs on the front panel provide an indication active.
of the system status.
5. Ensure configuration was performed properly.
6. After any modifications have been made either to

the installation or to configuration software, always
check the entire system for proper operation in
order to ensure that the changes were performed
properly.
14.1 4-23 95-8533

EDIO Startup STARTUP PROCEDURE for DCIO MODULE
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Configuration
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off. The DCIO Module is an eight-channel device. Each
channel is capable of being configured as an input or
2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state output, independent of any other channel.
of the input device (channel active LED illuminates
when the circuit is closed). Check the input Note
power supply and associated wiring. Verify The module is configured using Det-Tronics
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. Safety System Software.
3. The output circuits should indicate the proper

Activation Time
state for the programmed device (channel active
LED illuminates when the circuit is active). Check Timers are made available for output circuits only.
the power supply and associated wiring. Verify Timers are used primarily to set the timing of output
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. release in a suppression system. Timers provide a
pulse timed output for the time period specified in the
4. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition configuration of the channel. The channel output
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is goes active when commanded by the system logic
in fault). Check the end-of-line devices and and remains on until the timer expires.
associated wiring. Verify proper voltage per the
Troubleshooting matrix.
Static Logic Mode
5. Test the entire system for proper operation to Each input channel can be configured as a Fire
ensure that the configuration was performed Alarm, Trouble, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm,
properly. Supervisory, or Other type of channel, independent of
any other channel configuration. The type selected
determines the logic the system uses to configure
Indicators, Alarms and Messages.
For example: When an input is selected as Fire type,

the Fire LED on the Controller and Audible alarm will
automatically actuate when that input channel is
active.
14.1 4-24 95-8533

DCIO Startup Relay Module Startup
1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The 1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
Fault LED should blink once on power up, then Fault LED should blink once on power up, then
remain off. remain off.
2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state 2. The output circuits should indicate the proper
of the input device (channel active LED illuminates state for the programmed device (channel active
when the circuit is closed). Check the input LED illuminates when the circuit is active).
power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. 3. Test the entire system for proper operation to
ensure that the configuration was performed
3. The output circuits should indicate the proper properly.
LED illuminates when the circuit is active). Check
Analog Input Module Startup
the power supply and associated wiring. Verify
proper voltage per the Troubleshooting matrix. 1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
4. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition remain off.
(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
in fault). Check the end-of-line devices and 2. The input circuits should indicate the proper state
associated wiring. Verify proper voltage per the for the programmed device (channel active LED
Troubleshooting matrix. illuminates when the circuit is active).
5. Test the entire system for proper operation to 3. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition
ensure that the configuration was performed (channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
properly. in fault).
4. Test the entire system for proper operation to

properly.
Intelligent Protection Module Startup

1. The Power-on LED should be illuminated. The
remain off.
2. The output circuits should indicate the proper

LED illuminates when the circuit is active).
3. The circuits should not indicate a fault condition

(channel fault LED illuminates when the circuit is
in fault).
4. Test the entire system for proper operation to

properly.
14.1 4-25 95-8533

Section 5 To test O-ring: remove it from the enclosure and
stretch it slightly. If cracks are visible, replace it. If it
Maintenance feels dry, a thin coating of lubricant should be
applied. When re-installing the O-ring, be sure that it
is properly seated in the housing groove. It is
Note imperative that this O-ring be properly installed and in
Refer to the Eagle Quantum Premier System good condition. Failure to properly maintain it can
Safety Manual (number 95-8599) for specific allow water to enter the enclosure and cause
requirements and recommendations applicable premature failure. A coating of lubricant should also
to the proper installation, operation, and be applied to the threads on the cover before
maintenance of all SIL-Certified EQP systems. re-assembling the enclosure. This will both lubricate
the cover threads and help prevent moisture from
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE entering the enclosure.
To ensure reliable protection, it is important to check caution!

and calibrate the system on a regularly scheduled
basis. The frequency of checks is determined by the The O-rings should be lubricated with a silicone
requirements of the particular installation. free grease. The use of other lubricants is not
recommended, since they can adversely affect
the performance of some sensors. Under no
BATTERIES circumstances should a lubricant or compound
Batteries must be replaced every 48 months, or containing silicone be used on systems using
sooner if required by local codes. catalytic type combustible gas sensors.
IMPORTANT!
GAS SENSOR MAINTENANCE
Only sealed batteries are to be used.
All gas sensors must be calibrated on a regular basis.
Calibration should typically be performed every 90
MANUAL CHECK OF OUTPUT DEVICES days for catalytic and electrochemical sensors.
It is important that response devices be checked
initially when the system is installed, as well as Catalytic sensors have a finite lifespan. If a
periodically during an on-going maintenance successful calibration cannot be performed, replace
program. the sensor and recalibrate following the procedure
described in the “Calibration” section below. Always
compare part numbers to be sure that the correct
caution! replacement sensor is being used.
Be sure to secure all output devices that are
actuated by the system to prevent unwanted caution!
activation of equipment, and remember to place
these output devices back into service when the Exposure of the sensor to high concentrations of
checkout is complete. combustible gases for extended periods of time
can introduce stress to the sensing element and
seriously affect its performance. After exposure,
O-RING MAINTENANCE recalibration should immediately be performed,
and the sensor should be replaced if necessary.
warning! Note
The hazardous area must be de-classified prior Electrochemical sensors have a finite lifespan. If
to removing a junction box cover with power a successful calibration cannot be performed,
applied. inspect the hydrophobic filter. If the filter is
plugged, replace it and recalibrate the sensor. If
A rubber O-ring is used to ensure that the junction the filter is in good condition, replace the sensor.
box cover will seal tightly and provide protection Recalibrate following the procedure described in
against water entry. The enclosure should be opened the “Calibration” section.
periodically, and the O-ring inspected for breaks,
cracks and dryness.
14.1 5-1 95-8533

CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
To ensure optimum performance, calibration must be GND
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. Since
each application is different, the length of time
11
12
between regularly scheduled recalibrations can vary
13
10
14
9
from one installation to the next. In general, the more
8
7
SW1
6
frequently a system is checked, the greater the
5
4
3
MAGNETIC REED SWITCH *
reliability.
2
1
IMPORTANT!
4 to 20 ma devices not manufactured by Det-
Tronics must be pre-calibrated. To ensure A1881
adequate protection, calibration must be * TO ACTIVATE THE MAGNETIC REED SWITCH,

HOLD THE CALIBRATION MAGNET AGAINST THE SIDE OF THE ENCLOSURE
AT THE LOCATION OF THE REED SWITCH,
performed on a regularly scheduled basis. APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH ABOVE THE MOUNTING SURFACE.
Figure 5-1—DCU Terminal Wiring Board Mounted in Six-Port

NOTE Junction Box
If the calibration procedure is not completed
within 12 minutes, the detector will revert back to
the previous calibration values. The red LED will CALIBRATION ALGORITHM A
blink. The calibration will be logged as aborted. FOR MANUAL CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCU
NOTE Normal Calibration

The “Sensor Replacement” calibration procedure
1. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks
must be used for the initial calibration of a new
while the reed switch is closed.)
sensor. The “Routine Calibration” procedure can
be used for all subsequent calibrations.
2. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
seconds, the calibrate LED blinks, indicating it is
NOTE
ready for the zero input.
Some calibration procedures require the
operator to activate the reed switch located on a
3. Enter the zero input (4 ma).
circuit board inside the junction box. See Figure
5-1 for reed switch location. To activate the
switch, hold the calibration magnet against the
while the switch is closed.)
side of the junction box near the switch location
approximately one inch above the mounting
5. After the reed switch has been closed for 3
surface. (Do not open the junction box.) Hold
seconds, the communication module records the
the calibration magnet in place for approximately
uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
4 seconds to initiate the calibration procedure.
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED
stays on steady.)
6. Apply the calibration gas.
7. The calibrate LED blinks as the input increases.

while the reed switch is closed.)
9. The communication module records the

calibrates the span value after the reed switch is
on for 3 seconds.
10. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
14.1 5-2 95-8533

11. Remove the span gas, and return the analog 13. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
input to normal. turns off.)
12. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED blinks for Note
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed) Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
calibration and starts over.
13. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
turns off. Note
Resetting the communication module will abort
Note the sensor replacement.
If the calibration is not completed within 12
minutes, the previous calibration values are CALIBRATION ALGORITHM C
restored and the calibration is logged as FOR COMBUSTIBLE GAS DCUs AND
aborted. The calibrate LED will flash. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF UNIVERSAL DCUs
Sensor Replacement
caution!
warning! After exposing the H 2 S sensor to high
concentrations of gas, it should be exposed to
fresh air for at least 30 minutes, and
re-calibrated.
applied.
1. Open the junction box cover and press the Routine Calibration
Sensor Replacement Switch.
1. Apply the zero gas.
2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
2. Activate the reed switch for at least 4 seconds.
will flash, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
(The red LED flashes for 3 seconds while the
switch is activated.)
3. Replace the sensor and apply the zero input (4 ma).
3. The calibrate LED on the communication module
4. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
4. Wait until the calibrate LED stays on steady
(approximately 4 seconds).
uncalibrated value in position one of the
calibration log and calibrates the zero value. (The
Note
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
The communication module records the
6. Apply the calibration gas.
calibrates the zero value during this time.
7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input
5. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
increases.
flashes when the sensor detects gas.)
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
3 seconds while the reed switch is closed.)
uncalibrated value in the calibration log, and
calibrates the span value.
uncalibrated value in the first register of the
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
8. Remove the calibration gas.
11. Remove the span gas and return the analog input
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
to normal.
input drops below 4% full scale.
14.1 5-3 95-8533

10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED 8. Activate the reed switch for 4 seconds. (The red
turns off.) LED flashes for 3 seconds while the switch is
activated.) The communication module records
NOTE the uncalibrated value in position one of the
If the calibration procedure is not completed calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
within 12 minutes, calibration will be aborted and calibrate LED goes on steady.
the detector will revert back to the previous
calibration values. The red LED will flash and the 9. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”
calibration will be logged as aborted. position.
10. Apply the calibration gas and wait for the output
Initial Installation and Sensor Replacement —
to stabilize.
Combustible Gas (CGS Sensor)
NOTE 11. With 50% LFL calibration gas applied to sensor,
When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers to adjust R3 for a reading of 1.2 vdc (12 ma) on the
be sure that the correct replacement sensor is used. volt meter.
12. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal”

warning!
position. (The red LED flashes.)
to removing a junction box cover with power 13. Activate the reed switch. The red LED flashes for
applied. 3 seconds while the switch is activated.
1. Remove the cover from the DCUEX enclosure. 14. The communication module records the
2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the calibration log and calibrates the span value. The
communication module for approxImately 1 calibrate LED stays on steady.
second. (The calibrate LED on the communication
module flashes, indicating that it is ready for the 15. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU
zero input.) enclosure cover.
NOTE 16. The communication module waits until the analog

Pressing the sensor replacement switch value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration
prevents the communication module from is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.)
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
zero due to sensor removal. The calibration will Note
not be aborted if the calibration procedure is not Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts
completed within 12 minutes. the current calibration.
3. Move the Calibration Switch to the “calibrate”

Sensor Replacement — Toxic Gas
position.
NOTE
4. Replace the sensor. When replacing a sensor, compare part numbers
to be sure the correct replacement sensor is
5. Connect a volt meter to the test points on the being used.
transmitter board. Connect the “+” lead to TP1
(red). Connect the “–” lead to TP2 (black).
warning!
6. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
stabilize, then adjust R2 for a reading of 0.40 vdc to removing a junction box cover with power
(4 ma) on the meter. applied.
NOTE 1. Remove the cover from the DCU enclosure.

Do not make adjustments to R1 when calibrating
the sensor. 2. Press the Sensor Replacement Switch on the
communication module for approximately 1
7. Move the Calibrate Switch to the “normal” second. (The calibrate LED flashes,
position. indicating it is ready for the zero input.)
14.1 5-4 95-8533

NOTE 4. The communication module waits 3 seconds.
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from 5. The communication module records the
generating a fault signal when the input drops to uncalibrated value in the calibration log and
zero due to sensor removal. The calibration will calibrates the span value.
not be aborted if the calibration procedure is not
completed within 12 minutes. 6. The calibrate LED stays on steady.
3. Replace the sensor. 7. The communication module waits 3 seconds.
4. Wait at least 5 minutes for the sensor output to 8. Calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED turns
stabilize. off.)

Sensor Replacement
3 seconds while the switch is activated.) The
communication module records the uncalibrated
warning!
value in position one of the calibration log and
calibrates the zero value. (The calibrate LED The hazardous area must be de-classified prior
stays on steady.) to removing a junction box cover with power
applied.
6. Apply the calibration gas. (The calibrate LED
flashes when the input increases.) 1. Open the junction box cover and press the
Sensor Replacement Switch.
3 seconds while the switch is activated.) 2. The calibrate LED on the communication module
flashes, indicating it is ready for the zero input.
uncalibrated value in the first register of the 3. Replace the sensor and set the Sensor Switch
calibration log and calibrates the span value. (The (located on the sensor cell) to zero.
calibrate LED stays on steady.)
9. Remove the calibration gas and replace the DCU 3 seconds while the switch is closed.)
enclosure cover.
10. The communication module waits until the analog uncalibrated value in position one of the
value drops below 4% full scale. The calibration calibration log and calibrates the zero value. The
is complete. (The calibrate LED turns off.) calibrate LED stays on steady.
Note 6. Set the Zero Switch on the sensor to the “normal”

Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch aborts position. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen) to set
the calibration and starts over. the sensor analog span value.
CALIBRATION ALGORITHM D 7. The calibrate LED flashes when the input goes
FOR UNIVERSAL DCUs WITH O2 SENSOR high.
Normal Calibration 8. Activate the reed switch. (The red LED flashes for
1. Apply clean air (20.9% oxygen).
calibration log and calibrates the span value.
switch is closed.)
10. The calibration is complete. The calibrate LED
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating calibration
turns off.
has begun.
Note
Pressing the sensor replacement switch aborts
the calibration.
14.1 5-5 95-8533

CALIBRATION ALGORITHM G Note
FOR DCUs WITH POINTWATCH OR DUCTWATCH Allow at least 10 minutes for the sensor to warm
up.
Routine Calibration
Note
1. Apply the zero gas.
Pressing the Sensor Replacement Switch
prevents the communication module from
generating a fault signal when the input drops to
zero.
switch is activated.)
Note
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating it is ready
The calibration will not be aborted if the
for the zero input.
calibration procedure is not completed within 12
minutes.
4. When a steady zero reading is obtained, the
communication module records the uncalibrated
2. Apply zero gas.
value in the calibration log and calibrates the zero
value during this time. The LED stays on steady.
3. The calibrate LED flashes, indicating that it is
ready for the zero input.
5. Apply calibration gas. (The calibrate LED flashes
when the sensor detects gas.)
4. Continue from step 4 of the PointWatch/
DuctWatch routine calibration procedure
6. When the sensor input has been stable for 30
described above.
calibrates the span value.
DEVICE CALIBRATION LOGS AND
7. The calibrate LED stays on steady. RECORDS
The DCU keeps a calibration log in non-volatile
8. Remove the calibration gas.
memory that can be used by the operator to evaluate
the remaining life of some sensors. This log includes
9. The communication module waits until the sensor
the zero, span, date and time for each successful
input drops below 4% full scale.
calibration. An aborted calibration is indicated by
zeros in the zero and span values. The calibration log
10. The calibration is complete. (The calibrate LED
is cleared when the sensor replacement switch is
turns off.)
pressed and the calibration is successfully
completed.
NOTE
Calibration is aborted if not complete within 12
The initial calibration is logged in position one, where
minutes. If not completed, the detector will revert
it remains for the life of the sensor. If more than 8
back to the previous calibration values. The red
calibrations are performed without the sensor
LED will flash and the calibration will be logged
replacement switch being pressed, the newest
as aborted.
calibration data will replace the second oldest so that
the initial calibration data can be saved. The old
Sensor Replacement calibration data will be lost. This feature enables
sensor sensitivity trending to aid in maintenance or
warning! troubleshooting.
The analog value for the sensor is represented in raw
analog-to-digital counts 0 to 4095, where 0 represents
applied.
0 ma and 4095 represents 24 ma.
1. Remove power from the DCU and PointWatch/
DuctWatch unit. Replace the PointWatch unit.
Apply power. Press the Sensor Replacement TROUBLESHOOTING
Switch on the communication module for
Tables 5-1 and 5-2 are provided to assist in locating
approxImately 1 second.
the source of a system problem.
14.1 5-6 95-8533

Table 5-1—System Controller Troubleshooting Guide
Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action

Controller Power LED/ No Power to Input. - Measure input voltage (18 to 30 VDC).
Text Display OFF. - Check that P1 is fully inserted.
If voltage is present and P1 is fully inserted, replace
controller.
LON Fault – LED lit. LON wiring is shorted or open. - Check that P7 is fully inserted.
- Using the EQ Safety System Software, determine the
location of open or short via LON Diagnostics screen.
- Use a multimeter to determine wiring fault.
Trouble Relay is Active. Any monitored device in the - Using the front panel display/controls, view all points
system including ground fault in alarm/fault and identify faulted device.
in fault condition. Repair or replace faulted device as necessary.
Digital inputs are not
- Bad input switch. - Check that P2 and P3 are fully inserted.
responding.
- Faulty input channel. - Using a voltmeter, measure input terminals with contact
- Faulty wiring. closed to the input (measures 0 vdc when input contact
- Configuration error. is closed, measures approximately 23 vdc with circuit
open and 24 vdc input at the controller).
- If input does not respond to a contact closure, replace
module (verify response with EQ Safety System
Software/textual display).
- Verify configuration.
Relay outputs are not - Bad relay channel. - Check that P4 and P5 are fully inserted.
responding to an output - Faulty output wiring. - When output should be energized, measure contact
command. - User logic. resistance using an ohm meter.
- Verify that wiring from output is not open.
- Using EQ Safety System Software, verify that logic is
trying to operate the channel.
Serial links are not responding. - Faulty wiring. - Check that P8 and P9 are fully inserted.
- Incorrect serial link - Verify that communication LEDs are flashing.
configuration. - Verify that serial link configuration matches the host
- Text display shows device.
“Invalid Configuration” - Verify that wiring is not open or shorted.
Front panel pushbuttons are - Power OFF. - Verify that power is present and P1 is fully inserted.
not working. - Controller is faulted. - Cycle power to controller.
Text display indicates a Power loss for more than - Using the Safety System Software, execute “Set RTC”,
RTC Fault. 12 hours. which downloads the current time into the Controller’s
real time clock. Alternatively, use the “Set Time and
Date” menu in the Controller.
Table 5-2—Troubleshooting Guide - DCIO Module
I/O Type Normal (Off) Normal (On) Open (Off) Open (On) Short (Off) Short (On)
Unsupervised Input –15.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0

Supervised Input (EOL Resistor) –14.4 0 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Supervised Input (EOL/Inline Resistors) –15.4 –15 –15.4 –15.4 0 0
Unsupervised Output –15.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Agent Release) 0 to 2.1 Note 2 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Supervised Output (Notification) –14.4 23.9 –15.4 23.9 0 0
Notes:
1. All measurements are in Volts and are measured in reference to the common terminal and 24.0 Vdc is the module’s input.
2. Value is dependent on the resistance of the solenoid attached.
14.1 5-7 95-8533

REPLACEMENT PARTS Power Supplies
Part Number Description
Eagle Quantum Premier devices are not designed to
006979-001 EQ21xxPSM Power Supply Monitor
be repaired in the field. If a problem should develop,
first carefully check for proper wiring, programming 000604-013 EQ2110PS Power Supply (10 A / 60 Hz)
and calibration. If it is determined that the problem is 000604-014 EQ2130PS Power Supply (30 A / 60 Hz)
caused by an electronic defect, the device must be 000604-015 EQ2175PS Power Supply (75 A / 60 Hz)
returned to the factory for repair.
000604-034 EQ2111PS Power Supply (10 A / 50 Hz)
NOTE 000604-035 EQ2131PS Power Supply (30 A / 50 Hz)
When replacing a device, be sure that all rocker 000604-036 EQ2176PS Power Supply (75 A / 50 Hz)
switches on the replacement are set the same 007941-001 EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
as the original device. Consult the settings
010988-001 EQP2120PS–B Power Supply,
documented during system installation and
20A/50-60 Hz, Panel Mount
setup to determine proper settings for the new
device. Remove power before removing a 010988-002 EQP2120PS Power Supply,
device or plugging in a replacement unit. When 20A/50-60 Hz, DIN Rail Mount
a device is replaced, configuration is done 010985-001 EQ2110PS–P Power Supply,
automatically. 10A/50-60 Hz, Panel Mount
010985-002 EQ2110PS Power Supply,
10A/50-60 Hz, DIN Rail Mount
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN 010892-001 EQ2410PS–P Converter,
10A/24 Vdc, Panel Mount
Prior to returning devices or components, contact the 010892-002 EQ2410PS Converter,
nearest local Detector Electronics office so that a 10A/24 Vdc, DIN Rail Mount
Service Order number can be assigned. A written
009934-001 Diode Redundancy Module,
statement describing the malfunction must
with Mounting Bracket
accompany the returned device or component to
expedite finding the cause of the failure. 009934-002 Diode Redundancy Module,
DIN Rail Mount
Pack the unit or component properly. Use sufficient
packing material in addition to an antistatic bag or LON Devices
aluminum-backed cardboard as protection from
Part Number Description
electrostatic discharge.
006608-xxx EQ22xxIDC Initiating Device Circuit
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the 006943-xxx EQ22xxIDCGF Ground Fault Monitor
factory in Minneapolis. 007257-xxx EQ22xxIDCSC Initiating Device
Circuit Short Circuit
006607-xxx EQ22xxDCU Digital Communication
ORDERING INFORMATION Unit (specify gas)
When ordering, please specify: 006733-xxx EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module
006738-xxx EQ25xxSAM Signal Audible Module
Refer to the appropriate model matrix in Appendix G for 006941-xxx EQ24xxNE Network Extender
the following devices:
008056-001 HART Interface Module
EQ3XXX EQP Controller 008982-001 EQ3LTM LON Termination Module
EQ3700DCIO Discrete Input/Output Module
EQ3710AIM Analog Input Module
EQ3720RM Relay Module
EQ3730EDIO Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module
EQ3740IPM Intelligent Protection Module
14.1 5-8 95-8533

REDUNDANCY For additional information or for assistance in
Part Number Description ordering, please contact:
008981-001 Controller to Controller Detector Electronics Corporation
High-Speed Serial Link Cable (4 ft) 6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
008982-001 EQ3LTM LON Termination Module
Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491
Controller Communication Cables Fax: (952) 829-8750
Part Number Description Web site: www.det-tronics.com
E-mail: det-tronics@det-tronics.com
007633-001 Controller RS-232 Cable,
DB9 Female PC Connection,
15 ft. (4.57 m)
30 ft. (9.14 m)
50 ft. (15.24 m)
14.1 5-9 95-8533

Section 6 Trouble Output—
SPDT normally open/normally closed contact,
Specifications Non-Configurable, normally energized only.
note TEMPERATURE RANGE—

For USCG Approved System specifications, refer Operating (ordinary locations, Det-Tronics verified):
to Appendix D. –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
EQ3XXX CONTROLLER Operating (Certified Rating):
See Certification section below.
INPUT VOLTAGE— Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will Excluding communication port optional modules.
not cause damage to the equipment.
HUMIDITY RANGE—
INPUT power— 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
9 watts nominal, 12 watts maximum.
VIBRATION—
LON communication— FM 3260, FM 6310/6320.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
kbps). DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-1.
RS-485 communication—
MODBUS Master/Slave capability. Shipping Weight—
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to 5 pounds (2.3 kilograms).
115 kbps).
Certification—
RS-232 communication— FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
S3 configuration only. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Digital communication, optically isolated.
FFM
M
APPROVED
Tamb
®
= –40°C to +80°C.
®
Performance verified.
APPROVED
Controlnet— Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details,

Digital communication, transformer isolated (5 Mbps). including Protected Premises Fire Alarm Systems and
EQP Supervising Systems.
serial interface board— Refer to Appendix B for CSA Certification details.
Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.
RS-485 Communication: MODBUS master/slave
capability, ground fault monitored. CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (up to
230 kbps).
RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave or ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
S3 configuration capability. Ex nC IIC T4 Gc.
Digital communication, non-isolated (up to 230
FM
kbps). ® EN 60079-29-1 & EN 60079-29-4.
DEMKO 02 ATEX 133867X.
APPROVED
RS-232 Communication: MODBUS master/slave Tamb* = –40°C to +80°C.

capability. Tamb = –40°C to +70°C.
Digital communication, non-isolated (up to 230 kbps).
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
High Speed Serial Link (HSSL): Port used only for
Ex nC IIC T4 Gc.
redundant controller to controller communication.
Tamb* = –40°C to +80°C.
Tamb = –40°C to +70°C.
Unsupervised Outputs—
Dry Contact Rating: 1 ampere at 30 vdc maximum. Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
SPDT normally open/normally closed contact, approval details and Special Conditions for Safe Use.
Configurable for normally energized or de-energized
*Applicable only if relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) are
(de-energized is the default mode).
configured such that the relay contacts are normally
open and de-energized (refer to Figures 3-8 and 3-9
Unsupervised Inputs—
for relay wiring information).
Two State input (on/off). User selectable normally
open or normally closed contact (N.O. is the default).
14.1 6-1 95-8533

10.75
(27.3)
2.45
(6.22)
EQ3LTM LON TERMINATION MODULE
7.0
(17.78)
Input Voltage—
24 Vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. 10% overvoltage will not
DET-TRONICS
®
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER 5.95

cause damage to the equipment.
Safety System Controller (15.1)
Eagle Quantum Premier
Time & Date

Fire Alarm
High Gas
Trouble
Cntrl Flt
Inhibit
Out Inhibit
Power
Supr 5.5
Input Power—
(14.0) 1 watt maximum.
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
10.75 2.70 HUMIDITY RANGE—

(27.3) (6.86)
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
DET-TRONICS
®

DIMENSIONS—
5.5 See Figure 6-2.
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr (14.0)
Shipping Weight—
0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS CERTIFICATION—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).

10.75
(27.3)
2.70
(6.86)
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
DET-TRONICS
®

(17.0)
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
5.5
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr (14.0)
ATEX: II 3 G.
FM
APPROVED
Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence Ex nA IIC T4 Gc.

FM ®
DIMENSIONS OF DIN RAIL MOUNT CONTROLLER
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
WITH OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD

Ex nA IIC T4 Gc.
10.75 0.35
(27.3) (0.89) Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
8.2 2.1
(20.8) (5.3)
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx

approval details and Special Conditions for
DET-TRONICS
®
Safe Use.
Safety System Controller (15.1)
0.7
(1.75)
Time & Date High Gas Cntrl Flt Out Inhibit Supr 6.7 2.95
(17.0) (7.5)
7.0 2.16
(5.5)
(17.78)
1.87
DIMENSIONS OF PANEL MOUNT CONTROLLER
(4.75)
H2103
WITH OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD
A2253
Figure 6-1—Dimensions of EQP Controller in Inches (Centimeters)
Figure 6-2—Dimensions of LON Termination Module and
HART Interface Module in Inches (Centimeters)
14.1 6-2 95-8533

EQ3730EDIO ENHANCED DISCRETE DIMENSIONS—
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE Refer to Figure 6-3.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— SHIPPING WEIGHT—

3 watts nominal, 11 watts maximum. 1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
INPUT VOLTAGE— certification—

24 Vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. 10% overvoltage will FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
not cause damage to the equipment. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
21 to 30 Vdc for Pre-action / Deluge applications. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
Note: For deluge and pre-action applications, input Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
voltage to the device must be 21 Vdc minimum to ensure
proper operation of the connected output device. CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
Output Current—
10.0 amperes maximum total current, 2.0 amperes ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
maximum per channel. Ex nA nC IIC T4 GC EN 60079-29-1.
FM ®
SLC OUTPUT— APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
kbps). IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
Ex nA nC IIC T4 GC.
TEMPERATURE RANGE— Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
HUMIDITY RANGE— Safe Use.
VIBRATION—
FM 3260-2000 (clause 4.9).
1.35 2.5
(3.4) (6.4)
1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6
5.02
(12.7)
4.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (11.3)
4.5
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C (11.3) A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
5.2
5.2 1.66 (13.2) 1.9
A2449 (13.2) (4.2) (4.8)
PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS DIN RAIL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Figure 6-3—Dimensions of the EDIO / DCIO / Relay Module / AIM / IPM in Inches (Centimeters)
14.1 6-3 95-8533

INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING-Signaling CIRCUIT
UNSUPERVISED INPUT— MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)—
Two state input (on/off). 2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
Normally open contact. Automatic short circuit protection provided.
Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes.
SUPERVISED INPUT (Open Circuit)—
For Class A and Class B wiring. SUPERVISORY CURRENT (Per Channel)—
Two state input (active/trouble): Reverse current monitored at 1.5 mA, ± 0.5 mA.
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms RESPONSE TIME—
– Active Circuit < 5 K ohms. Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
an alarm command message.
SUPERVISED INPUT (Open and Short Circuit)—
For Class A and Class B wiring.
EOL RESISTORS—
Three State input (active/short/open):
10 K ohms ±2 K ohms. Each circuit must have an
– End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
EOL resistor.
– In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms nominal
– Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
– Short Circuit < 250 ohms
Configurable for device applications:
– Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
– Continuous
INPUT, TYPES— – 60 beats per minute
Configurable for static logic applications: – 120 beats per minute
– Fire Alarm – Temporal Pattern.
– Supervisory Note: All eight channels are synchronized when
– Trouble programmed as a signaling output.
– High Gas Alarm
– Low Gas Alarm SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING-Releasing CIRCUIT
– Other. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)—
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
For Class A wiring on inputs, configure adjacent
Automatic short circuit protection provided.
channels for Class A wiring and connect both channels
Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes.
to single contact device(s).
INPUT CIRCUITS – TWO WIRE SMOKE/HEAT TYPE— SUPERVISORY CURRENT (Per Channel)—
Supervised Input, Class B: Monitored at 1.3 mA ±0.2 mA.
Up to 15 two wire detectors per circuit.
Maximum line resistance 50 ohms. RESPONSE TIME—
5K ohm EOL. Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
Open circuit fault impedance 22k ohms. an alarm command message.
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES—

OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING OR Configurable for device applications:
unsupervised DEVICE CIRCUITS – Continuous
UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING (Per Channel)— – Timed.
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
Automatic short circuit protection provided. For Class A wiring on outputs, configure adjacent
Instantaneous short circuit current < 15 amperes. channels for Class A wiring and connect both channels
Note: Voltage available at outputs is dependent on to single output device(s).
input voltage (Vout ≈ Vin – 0.5 Vdc).
note
OUTPUT STYLE— EDIO SIL has the capability of monitoring
Form "A" normally off. solenoid circuits for shorts. The minimum
solenoid inductance for correct operation is 100
RESPONSE TIME— mH. See Table 3-11 for a list of recommended
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging solenoids.
14.1 6-4 95-8533

EQ3700 DISCRETE IO (DCIO) CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
MODULE
POWER REQUIREMENTS— ATEX: FM
APPROVED II 3 G.
3 watts nominal, 11 watts maximum. Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
FM ® DEMKO 02 ATEX 133864X.
INPUT VOLTAGE— Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
APPROVED
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will

not cause damage to the equipment. IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X.
21 to 30 vdc for Pre-action / Deluge application. Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure
proper operation of the connected output device. Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
output voltage— Safe Use.
(Input voltage – 0.5 vdc) @ 2 amperes.
INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS
Output Current— UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
10.0 amperes maximum total current, 2.0 amperes Two state input (on/off).
maximum per channel. Normally open contact.
LON communication— SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—

Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 Two state input (active/trouble):
kbps). – End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
TEMPERATURE RANGE— – Active Circuit < 5 K ohms.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—
HUMIDITY RANGE— – End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms nominal
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. – In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms nominal
DIMENSIONS— – Short Circuit < 1.4 K ohms
Refer to Figure 6-3. – Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
SHIPPING WEIGHT— INPUT, TYPES—

1 pound (0.45 kilograms). Configurable for fixed logic applications:
– Fire Alarm
Certification— – Supervisory
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). – Trouble
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). – High Gas Alarm
FM
FM ®
®
APPROVED
APPROVED
– Low Gas Alarm
– Other.
14.1 6-5 95-8533

OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING CIRCUITS EQ3720 RELAY MODULE
UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— POWER REQUIREMENTS—
Short circuit protected: 2 amperes at 30 Vdc 3 watts nominal, 4 watts maximum.
maximum.
INPUT VOLTAGE—
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—Signaling 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
circuit not cause damage to the equipment.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT— relay contacts—

2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush. 30 VDC, 2 amps resistive.
Automatic short circuit protection provided. 125 VAC, 0.5 amp resistive (FM and CSA only).
LON communication—
SUPERVISORY CURRENT— Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
Reverse current monitored at 3.0 mA, ± 2.0mA.
RESPONSE TIME— Operating: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
EOL RESISTORS— 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
10 K ohms ±2 K ohms.
DIMENSIONS—
Refer to Figure 6-3.
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES—
Configurable for device applications: SHIPPING WEIGHT—
– Continuous 1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
– 60 beats per second
– 120 beats per second Certification—
– Temporal Pattern. FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
Note Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
All eight channels are synchronized when Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details.
programmed as a signaling output. Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details.

SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— Releasing
circuit
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT (Per Channel)— Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
2 amperes maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
FM ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 135246X.
Tamb = –40°C to +60°C.
APPROVED

SUPERVISORY CURRENT— Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
Monitored at 3.0 mA ±2.0 mA. Tamb = –40°C to +60°C.
RESPONSE TIME— Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx

Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging approval details and Special Conditions for
an alarm command message. Safe Use.
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES— RESPONSE TIME—

Configurable for device applications: Actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging an
– Continuous alarm command message.
– Timed.
14.1 6-6 95-8533

EQ3710AIM ANALOG INPUT MODULE HART INTERFACE MODULE (HIM)
POWER REQUIREMENTS— INPUT VOLTAGE—
Module power consumption: 6 watts. 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
When supplying power to three-wire transmitters: not cause damage to the equipment.
Maximum current at power input: 7.4 amperes.
Output current: 900 mA per channel maximum. INPUT POWER—
1.0 watt maximum.
INPUT/OUTPut VOLTAGE—
not cause damage to the equipment. input/OUTPUT current—
Operating: 4 -20 mA.
TEMPERATURE RANGE— Maximum: 0-30 mA.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). TEMPERATURE RANGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
HUMIDITY RANGE—
channel accuracy—
Zero: ±0.3% full scale from –40°C to +85°C.
Span: ±0.5% full scale from –40°C to +85°C.
DIMENSIONS—
response time— See Figure 6-2.
1 to 100 LON devices: < 2 seconds
101 to 200 LON devices: < 3 seconds Shipping Weight—
201 to 246 LON devices: < 4 seconds. 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
Lon communication— CERTIFICATION—

Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
DIMENSIONS—
Refer to Figure 6-3. FFM
M ® ®
APPROVED
APPROVED
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
1 pound (0.45 kilograms). CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
certification—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). ATEX FM
APPROVED II 3 G.
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). Ex nA IIC T4 Gc.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. F M ®
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.

Ex nA IIC T4 Gc.
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G. Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc EN60079-29-1.
FM ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 136207X. Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C. approval details and Special Conditions for
Safe Use.
Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc.
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C.
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX and IECEx

Safe Use.
14.1 6-7 95-8533

EQ3740IPM INTELLIGENT INPUT / INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS - CONTACT
PROTECTION MODULE MONITOR TYPE - channel 1 - 3
NOTE
POWER REQUIREMENTS—
An input must be active for at least 750
3 watts nominal, 7 watts maximum.
milliseconds in order to be recognized.
INPUT VOLTAGE—
UNSUPERVISED INPUT—
Two state input (on/off).
not cause damage to the equipment.
Normally open contact.
No EOL resistor required.
lon communications—
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—
kbps).
Two state input (active/trouble):
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%
Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
Active Circuit < 5 K ohms.
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B—
HUMIDITY RANGE—
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%
In Line Resistor 3.3 K ohms ±20%
DIMENSIONS—
Open Circuit > 45 K ohms
Refer to Figure 6-3.
Short Circuit < 1.4 K ohms
Active Circuit 2.5 K ohms to 5 K ohms.
SHIPPING WEIGHT—
1 pound (0.45 kilograms).
INPUT CIRCUITS - TWO WIRE SMOKE/HEAT TYPE -
certification— channel 4 AND 5
SUPERVISED INPUT, CLASS B:
Up to 15 two wire detectors per circuit.
Maximum line resistance 50 ohms
Special conditions for safe use: 5K ohm EOL
Electronic assembly must be installed in a suitable Open circuit fault impedance 22K ohms
NRTL labled NEMA rated enclosure.
OUTPUT / NOTIFICATION / RELEASING OR
unsupervised DEVICE CIRCUITS - CHANNEL 6-8
UNSUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—
Rating: 2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum.
Note: Voltage available at outputs is dependent on
input voltage (Vout ≈ Vin – 0.5 Vdc).
OUTPUT STYLE—
Form "A" normally off.
RESPONSE TIME—
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging
No EOL resistor required.
14.1 6-8 95-8533

SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING— EQ21XXPS POWER SUPPLIES
Signaling Type - channel 6
INPUT VOLTAGE—
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT—
Selectable for 120, 208 or 240 vac input power,
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
±10%.
INPUT CURRENT—
SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
60 Hz Models:
Reverse current monitored at 1.5 mA, ± 0.5 mA.
EQ2110PS: 4 amps at 120 VAC
End of Line Resistor 10 K ohms ±20%.
EQ2130PS: 11 / 6 / 6 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC
EQ2175PS: 24 / 15 / 12 amps at 120 / 208 / 240 VAC.
RESPONSE TIME—
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging 50 Hz Models:
an alarm command message. EQ2111PS: 4 amps at 120 VAC
EQ2131PS: 6 amps at 240 VAC
SIGNALING OUTPUT, TYPES— EQ2176PS: 12 amps at 240 VAC.
Configurable for device applications:
OUTPUT CURRENT—
Standard “SAM” selections—
EQ2110PS / EQ2111PS: 10 amperes at 24 VDC
Continuous
EQ2130PS / EQ2131PS: 30 amperes at 24 VDC
60 beats per minute
EQ2175PS / EQ2176PS: 75 amperes at 24 VDC.
120 beats per minute
Temporal Pattern.
POWER CONSUMPTION—
Trouble
EQ2110PS / EQ2111PS: 46 Watts
Supervisory
EQ2130PS / EQ2131PS: 140 Watts
EQ2175PS / EQ2176PS: 349 Watts.
SUPERVISED OUTPUT RATING—
Releasing Type - CHANNEL 7 AND 8 TEMPERATURE RANGE—
Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT— Storage: -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C).
2 amperes at 30 Vdc maximum, 15 Amp inrush.
Automatic short circuit protection provided. HUMIDITY RANGE—
Monitored at 1.3 mA ±0.2 mA. DIMENSIONS—
No EOL resistor required. in Inches (Centimeters)
Width Height Depth
RESPONSE TIME— EQ211xPS: 19 (48.3) 7 (17.8) 15 (38.1)
Output actuates in <0.15 second after acknowledging EQ213xPS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)
an alarm command message. EQ217xPS: 19 (48.3) 14 (35.6) 15 (38.1)
RELEASING OUTPUT, TYPES— NOTE

Configurable for device applications: Power supplies are designed for mounting in a
standard 19 inch rack. Optional mounting
– Continuous hardware is available for floor or wall mount
– Timed. applications.
Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations.
14.1 6-9 95-8533

EQP2XX0PS(–X) POWER SUPPLIES REDUNDANCY MODULE QUINT–DIODE/40
INPUT VOLTAGE— Temperature Range—
EQP2110PS(-P), EQP2120PS(-B): Auto selectable for Operating: –13°F to +131°F (–25°C to +55°C)
120/220 Vac, –15%, +10%; 60/50 Hz, single phase; (All Applications)
EQP2410PS(-P) Converter: 24 Vdc, –15%, +10%. Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C).
INPUT CURRENT— Humidity Range—

EQP2110PS(-P): 3.2 A max @ 120 Vac
1.7 A max @ 220 Vac
Dimensions—
EQP2120PS(-B): 6.6 A max @ 120 Vac in Inches (Centimeters)
3.6 A max @ 220 Vac Width Height Depth
2.4 (6.2) 4 (10.2) 3.3 (8.4)
EQP2410PS(-P): 15.7 A @ max @ 24 Vdc
Output Voltage—
24.5 Vdc nominal, 24.5 to 28.0 Vdc.
OUTPUT CURRENT—
EQP2110PS(-P): 10 A
EQP2120PS(-B): 20 A
EQP2410PS(-P): 10 A
TEMPERATURE RANGE (all models)—

Operating: –13°F to +131°F (–25°C to +55°C)
(All Applications)
Storage: –40°F to +185°F (–40°C to +85°C)
HUMIDITY RANGE—
5 to 95% RH at 25°C, non-condensing.
DIMENSIONS—
In Inches (Centimeters)
Width Height Depth
EQP2110PS(-P): 3.35(8.5) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)
EQP2120PS(-B): 3.54(9) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)
EQP2410PS(-P): 3.2(8.0) 5.2(13.0) 5.0(12.5)
NOTE
Power supplies are designed for DIN rail or
panel mounting (–B or –P suffix).
Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations.
USCG: Refer to Appendix D for details.
14.1 6-10 95-8533

EQ21XXPSM POWER SUPPLY MONITOR EQ22xxIDC/IDCGF INITIATING
DEVICE CIRCUIT
INPUT VOLTAGE—
24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 Vdc. INPUT VOLTAGE—
POWER CONSUMPTION— not cause damage to the equipment.
2.0 watts maximum.
INPUT POWER—
MEASUREMENT RANGE— 4.0 watts maximum.
AC Voltage: 240 vac maximum.
DC Battery Charging Current: 75 amperes maximum. INPUTS—
Two supervised non-incendive digital inputs (sealed
OUTPUT— or unsealed switch or relay contacts). 10 kohm EOL
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 k bps). resistors are required.
TEMPERATURE RANGE— OUTPUTS—

Operating: +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C) Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). kbps).
HUMIDITY RANGE— TEMPERATURE RANGE—

5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-4. HUMIDITY RANGE—
Certification—
FM / CSA: Ordinary locations. VIBRATION—
FM 3260.
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-5.
5.86
(14.9)
5.2
(13.2)
2.7
(6.9)
4.7
(11.9)
3.46
(8.8)
9
(22.9)
8.5
(21.6)
J3 2.25
J1 (5.7)
4
(10.2)
B C 6.57
(16.7)
2.5
1.28
(6.4)
(3.3)
A2523
A2038
Figure 6-4—Dimensions of Power Supply Monitor in Inches (CM) Figure 6-5—Dimensions of Tall Cover Junction Box in Inches
(Centimeters)
14.1 6-11 95-8533

Certification— EQ2220GFM GROUND FAULT MONITOR
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC. INPUT VOLTAGE—
FM ®Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G. 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
APPROVED
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). not cause damage to the equipment.
FM ®
INPUT POWER—
Class II/III, Div. 2, Groups F & G (T4).
1.0 watt maximum.
APPROVED
NEMA/Type 4X.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. OUTPUT—
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. Form C NO/NC relay contact rated 1 ampere
(resistive) at 30 Vdc maximum.
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details. Storage: –-67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
HUMIDITY RANGE—
APPROVED
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X DIMENSIONS—
® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) See Figure 6-6.
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
D
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) Shipping Weight—

IP66 0.5 pounds (0.2 kilograms)
IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010 CERTIFICATION—

Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) FFM
M ®
®
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C) APPROVED

APPROVED
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.

Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.
ATEX: FM
APPROVED
II 3 G
Ex nC IIC T4 Gc
FM ® DEMKO 03 ATEX 136222X
APPROVED
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C
IECEx: IECEx ULD 10.0004X

Ex nC IIC T4 Gc
Tamb = –40°C to +85°C
Note: Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval and

Appendix E for CE Mark details and Special
Conditions for Safe Use.
2.9 1.2
(7.4) (3.0)
2.1
(5.3)
1.75
(4.4)
A2237
Figure 6-6—Dimensions of Ground Fault Monitor

in Inches (Centimeters)
14.1 6-12 95-8533

EQ22XXDCU AND EQ22XXDCUEX EQ25xxARM AGENT RELEASE MODULE
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
RELEASE OUTPUT RATING—
INPUT VOLTAGE— 2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum.
not cause damage to the equipment. SUPERVISORY CURRENT—
2.0 ma, ±1.0 ma each circuit.
POWER CONSUMPTION—
DCU with toxic gas sensor/transmitter: 95 ma max. INPUT VOLTAGE—
DCU with transmitter and combustible gas sensor: not cause damage to the equipment.
180 ma maximum during normal operation, 500 ma NOTE: For deluge and pre-action applications, input
during startup. voltage to the device must be 21 vdc minimum to ensure
proper operation of the connected output device.
INPUTS—
4 - 20 mA analog signal, non-intrusive calibration. INPUT CURRENT—
Standby: 75 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
OUTPUTS—
Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
TEMPERATURE RANGE— STATUS OUTPUTS—

Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C). Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
HUMIDITY RANGE— Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C).
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C).
VIBRATION— HUMIDITY RANGE—

FM 6310/6320. 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
DIMENSIONS— VIBRATION—
See Figure 6-5. Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW.
Certification— DIMENSIONS—
FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D. See Figure 6-5.
FM ®
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
APPROVED
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4). Certification—
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4). FM / CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D.
FM ®
Class II/III, Div. 1 & 2 (for use with Model STB). Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
NEMA/Type 4X (for use with Model STB).
APPROVED
FM ®Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. APPROVED

Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4).
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (T4).
FM
®
CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant. APPROVED
NEMA/Type 4X.
ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
APPROVED
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb EN 60079-29-1 CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
FM ®
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
APPROVED
ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)

APPROVED
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
IP66 DEMKO 02 ATEX 131321X
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details. T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
FM ®
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X): APPROVED

T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
The device has an ambient temperature rating for T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
performance of –40°C to +75°C. IP66
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.
IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C) Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C) T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
Refer to Appendix D for USCG Approval details. T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details. Refer to Appendix E for CE Mark details.
14.1 6-13 95-8533
EQ25xxSAM SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE Certification—
OUTPUT RATING— Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
2 amperes at 30 vdc maximum. APPROVED
RESPONSE TIME— FM
®
Output relay actuates in <0.1 second after

APPROVED
NEMA/Type 4X.
acknowledging an alarm command message. Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details.
3.0 ma ± 2.0ma, each circuit. CE: ATEX/EMC Directive Compliant.
EOL RESISTORS —
10 kohm ± 2 kohm. Each circuit must have an EOL ATEX: 0539 II 2 G
FM
APPROVED
resistor. Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb

INPUT VOLTAGE— FM ® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
APPROVED
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)

T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
not cause damage to the equipment. IP66
INPUT CURRENT (Excluding Output Current)— Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.
Standby: 60 ma maximum at 24 vdc.
Alarm: 120 ma maximum at 24 vdc. IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010
Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
STATUS OUTPUT—
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
kbps).
Storage: –67°F to +185°F (–55°C to +85°C). EQ24xxNE NETWORK EXTENDER
INPUT VOLTAGE—
HUMIDITY RANGE— 24 vdc nominal, 18 to 30 vdc. 10% overvoltage will
5 to 95% RH, non-condensing. not cause damage to the equipment.
VIBRATION— POWER CONSUMPTION—

Meets MIL SPEC 810C, method 514.2, curve AW. 2.2 watts nominal at 24 vdc, 2.7 watts maximum.
DIMENSIONS— INPUTS/OUTPUTS—
See Figure 6-5. Digital, transformer isolated (78.5k Baud).
Operating: –40°F to +167°F (–40°C to +75°C)
HUMIDITY—
5 to 95% RH at 70°C.
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 6-7.
Certification—
Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC.
APPROVED
FM ®
APPROVED
NEMA/Type 4X.
14.1 6-14 95-8533

EQ3750ASH Addressable Smoke
& Heat Module
3.77
For complete information regarding the ASH Module,
(9.6) refer to instruction manual number 95-8654.
1.28
(3.3)
COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSOR
Refer to the Combustible Gas Sensor Specification
5.86 Data sheet, form 90-1041, for specifications.
(14.9)
5.2
(13.2)
2.7 ELECTROCHEMICAL SENSORS

(6.9)
Refer to the Electrochemical Gas Sensor Specification

Data sheet, form 90-1079, for specifications.
Electrochemical sensors available from Det-Tronics
4.7
include Hydrogen Sulfide, Oxygen, Carbon
(11.9) Monoxide, Chlorine, Sulfur Dioxide, and Nitrogen
3.46 Dioxide.
(8.8)
EQ21xxPS POWER SUPPLY

The EQ21xxPS Rectifier / Power Supply has many
A2531
inherent advantages such as voltage regulation, high

Figure 6-7—Dimensions of Short Cover Junction Box efficiency, high power factor and short circuit
in Inches (Centimeters)
protection.
These chargers provide separate adjustable voltages

for floating or equalizing lead or nickel-cadmium cells.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approval details. An equalize switch is located on the front panel of the
Refer to Appendix B for CSA Approval details. charger for manual activation or a multi-mode
electronic timer can be used for automatic activation.
Steady state output voltage remains within +/- 1/2% of
the setting from no load to full load and for AC input
ATEX: 0539 II 2 G.
FM
APPROVED
voltages within +/- 10% of the nominal input voltage.

Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb The power supply is internally filtered to be no greater
than 32dBrn (“C” message weighting) and 30
FM ® T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
APPROVED
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C) millivolts RMS for all conditions on input voltage and
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C) output load with or without batteries connected. This
IP66 allows the A36D to be used as a battery eliminator.
Refer to Appendix C for ATEX Approval details.
IEC: IECEx ULD 10.0010

Ex d IIC T4-T6 Gb
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +50°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +65°C)
T4 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)

14.1 6-15 95-8533

APPENDIX A
FM Approval Description
hazardous locations
• Refer to Figures A-1 and A-2 for System Classification details.

• EQxxxxEM versions rated nonincendive for Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
fire detection & releasing
• National Fire Alarm Code performance verified per ANSI/NFPA 72-2010. Refer to Table A-1 for supervision
characteristics.
• Refer to the Model X3301, X5200, X2200 and X9800 manuals (see Table 2-4) for further FM flame performance
details. Additional 2 second response time applied for system communication.
• Models EQ3700 Series and EQ22xxARM Series are Approved as agent releasing circuits and are Approved for use
with the following automatic deluge and pre-action solenoids:
FM Solenoid Group Manufacturer Model

B ASCO T8210A107
D ASCO 8210G207
E Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
F Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
G Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
H Viking HV-274-0601
gas detection
• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further FM gas performance details.
NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not FM verified.
• H2S Toxic Gas Performance verified 0 to 20, 50 or 100 ppm per FM requirements. Accuracy: ±2 ppm from 0 to 20
ppm, ±10% of concentration from 21 to 100 ppm. Models C7064E4012 and C7064E5012 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C and D Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Model
C7064E5014 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Sensors Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C and D Hazardous
(Classified) Locations per FM 3615. Operating temperature limits are –40°C to +40°C.
NOTE: Sensor cross sensitivity has not been verified by FM.
• Calibration of the above listed sensors has been FM verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX,
and PIRECL with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and/or 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any FM Approved 4-20 ma device.
NOTE
FM Approval of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such as
sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain FM Approval of the system, all
4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be FM Approved.
14.1 A-1 95-8533
NOTE
FM Approval allows the presence and operation of serial communications software in the Controller (MODBUS,
Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not included in the Approval.
Table A-1—Circuit Classifications
Signaling Path NFPA 72: 2010 Supervision

Local Operating Network (LON) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class X
Power Distribution Module, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Distribution Module, Controller Power Output Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Distribution Module, Field Device Power Output Supervised. Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72,
Cl. 10.17.1.
Power Distribution Module, Local Field Device Power Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Power Supply Monitor, Input Power Supervised. Loss of power per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.3.
Power Supply Monitor, Output Power Supervised (via Controller for opens).
Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1.
Power Supply Monitor, Charger Supervised. Loss of charger per NFPA Cl. 10.5.9.6.
Power Supply Monitor, Battery Supervised. Loss of battery per NFPA Cl. 10.17.3.
Controller, Digital Input Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, Trouble Relay Output Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, 232 Expansion Output (SIL or Non-SIL) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Controller, SLC485 Expansion Output, including Class B (Single Channel Single-Mode Fiber)
optional fiber optic equipment (SIL or Non-SIL) Class X (Multi-Mode Fiber or Dual Channel Single-Mode Fiber
or Dual Channel Wire)
Redundant Controller Connector, RS-232 (SIL or Non-SIL) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
& #10.17.1.9.
Relay Module, Output Unsupervised, for connection with ancillary equipment only.
Enhanced Discrete I/O, Input (software configurable, Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
SIL or Non-SIL) & #10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A or Class B
Enhanced Discrete I/O, Output (software configurable, Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8
SIL or Non-SIL) & #10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class A or Class B
Supervised Solenoids (Class A or Class B):
Group B: ASCO T8210A107
Group D: ASCO 8210G207
Group E: Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Group F: Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Group G: Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Group H: Viking HV-274-060-7
14.1 A-2 95-8533

Table A-1—Circuit Classifications-Continued
Signaling Path NFPA 72: 2010 Supervision

Discrete I/O, Input (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
#10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
Discrete I/O, Output (software configurable) Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
#10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B
Supervised Solenoids:
Group H: Viking HV-274-060-7
Analog Input Module (SIL or Non-SIL) Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
IDC Input Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class B
Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1, Exception #10.17.1.8 &
IDCGF Input (Channel 2 only)
#10.17.1.9.
SAM Output Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): Class B
ARM Output Supervised Solenoids:

Single open or ground-fault per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1
Group H: Viking 11601
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class A or Class B (single spur)
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) with Isolators Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class X
ASH Loop (Smoke & Heat Loop) with Isolators Signaling Line Circuit (SLC): Class B (single spur)
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1,
Input (software configurable) Exception #10.17.1.8 & #10.17.1.9.
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): Class A (Apollo)
Input - Smoke detector inputs
ASH - Addressable Smoke and Heat Module Unsupervised per ANSI/NFPA 72, Cl. 10.17.1,
Output (software configurable) Exception #10.17.1.8 & #10.17.1.9.
Notification Appliance Circuit (Apollo): Class A
14.1 A-3 95-8533

EQPSS supervising System
• National Fire Alarm Code performance verified per ANSI/NFPA 72-2002. Refer to Figures A-2 and B-2 for EQPSS
Supervising System architecture.
• Det-Tronics only to integrate proprietary EQPSS Supervising System per Det-Tronics Procedures 5072 and 5073.
EQP SYSTEM MODEL 000523-009 & 000523-010

• The System consists of:
1 x EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, primary; 1 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-009)
2 x EQP2410PS-P Converter, secondary; 0 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-010)
2 x QUINT–DIODE/40 Redundancy module; 0 x EQ3710AIM Module & 1 x EQ3730EDIO Module (000523-009)
1 x EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor 2 x EQ3710AIM Modules & 2 x EQ3730EDIO Modules (000523-010)
• The System is mounted within 60H x 36W x 16D Stainless Steel (type 316), NRTL labeled NEMA 4X rated
enclosure. The enclosure shall be lockable by key lock or padlock.
• EQP system models 000523-009 & 000523-010 are suitable for Cl I, Div. 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4); Cl I, Zone 2,
GRP IIC (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Tamb = –20°C to +49°C.
• Modifications to enclosure (such as conduit entry holes, windows etc.) are permitted when implemented by the
manufacturer of the enclosure.
14.1 A-4 95-8533

14.1
ON NEXT ECO: ADD 3900G INFO,
SEE 007546-001 FOR WORDING.
PER LAUREL 01/30/13
A-5A-5
Figure A-1 (System Drawing 007545-001T)
95-8533
95-8533
14.1
ON NEXT ECO: ADD 3900G INFO,
SEE 007546-001 FOR WORDING.
PER LAUREL 01/30/13
A-6
Figure A-2 (System Drawing 007545-001)
95-8533
APPENDIX B
CSA international certification Description
hazardous locations
• Refer to Figures B-1 and B-2 for System Classification details.

• EQxxxxEM versions rated Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (T4A).
gas detection
• Combustible Gas Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL methane-in-air atmospheres per CSA C22.2 No. 152.
Accuracy: ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51% to 100% LFL. For the Model PIRECL, refer to the
PIRECL manual (form number 95-8526) for further CSA gas performance details.
NOTE: Detector Electronics combustible gas detection K factors are not CSA verified.
• Calibration of the devices has been CSA verified using the respective EQ22xxDCU, EQ22xxDCUEX and PIRECL
Series with the Det-Tronics 225130-001 (50% LFL methane) and 227115-001 H2S Calibration Kits.
• The EQ22xxDCU Series can be used with any CSA Certified 4-20 ma device.
NOTE
CSA Certification of the 4-20 ma input does not include or imply approval of the gas detection apparatus such
as sensors, transmitters, or devices connected to the system. In order to maintain CSA Certification of the
system, all 4-20 ma gas detection instruments connected to the input must also be CSA Certified.
NOTE
CSA Certification allows the presence and operation of serial communications software in the Controller
(MODBUS, Allen Bradley protocols, etc.); however, the communications functions are not included in the
Certification.
14.1 B-1 95-8533

14.1
B-2
Figure B-1 (Drawing 007546-001P)
95-8533
14.1
B-3
Figure B-2 (Drawing 007546-001)
95-8533
APPENDIX C
ATEX and IECEx Certification
ATEX and IECEx Certification Details

The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection / Releasing System was tested and certified to hazardous
location and combustible gas performance standards. Refer to Figure C-1 for system classification details.
The ATEX/IECEx certified Eagle Quantum Premier System field devices EQ22..., EQ24... and EQ25... are in
compliance with the following standards:
– IEC 60079-0: 2011
– EN 60079-0: 2012
– IEC/EN 60079-1: 2010
– EN 60079-29-1: 2007
– EN 60079-29-4: 2010 (EQ3XXX Only)
The ATEX/IECEx certified Ex n modules of the EQP system are in compliance with the following standards:
– IEC 60079-0: 2011
– EN 60079-0: 2012
– IEC/EN 60079-15: 2010
– EN 60079-29-1: 2007
– EN 60079-29-4: 2010 (EQ3XXX Only)
For all ATEX/IECEx certified Ex n modules in the EQP system, the following Special Conditions for Safe Use apply:
The ambient temperature range is limited for EQ3XXX:
– From –40°C to +70°C if any of the output relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) is used (energized).
– From –40°C to +80°C if all output relays 1-7 (terminals 21-41) remain open-contacted and de-energized.
For compliance to EN 60079-29-1/-4, the relevant Ex n module must be used with gas detection apparatus that are
certified for compliance to EN60079-29-1/-4 and that provide a suitable linear 4-20 mA output, relay contact output or
LON communication output relative to the %LFL of the available gas in the area of the gas detection apparatus. See
the Manual for details on the required connection parameters.
The EQP Ex n modules shall be used in an area of no more than pollution degree 2 conforming to IEC 60664-1, and
in an enclosure with a tool removable cover that complies with all relevant requirements of IEC/EN 60079-15, rated at
least IP54, and shall be connected to supply circuits where the rated voltage cannot be exceeded by 40% caused by
transient disturbances.
14.1 C-1 95-8533

Performance Testing to EN 60079-29-1: 2007 and EN 60079-29-4: 2010
The measuring function of the EQ3XXX Controller, according to Annex II paragraph 1.5.5, 1.5.6 and 1.5.7 of the
Directive 94/9/EC, was covered in this Type Examination Certificate in the following configurations:
1. Controller Model EQ3XXX with EQ3710AIM or EQ3700DCIO or EQ3730EDIO or EQ22XXDCU (tested as a stand-
alone control unit with a calibrated linear 4-20mA simulator input signal or relay contacts (as applicable).
2. Controller Model EQ3XXX with EQ22xxDCUEX and STB and CGS (tested as a gas detection system with methane
applied to the CGS).
3. Controller Model EQ3XXX with CTB and PIRECL (tested as a gas detection system with methane applied to the
PIRECL).
4. Controller Model EQ3XXX with UD10/DCU Emulator and CGS Conditioning Board, in combination with the
Det‑Tronics gas sensor Model CGS (tested as a gas detection system with methane applied to the CGS).
5. Controller Model EQ3XXX with OPECL.
For the ATEX certified Eagle Quantum Premier System field devices EQ22XXDCU and EQ22XXDCUEX, the
following Special Condition for Safe Use applies:
The field devices EQ22XXDCU and EQ22XXDCUEX have an ambient temperature rating for performance of –40°C to
+75°C.
Important Note
All applied gas detectors must be ATEX certified to EN60079-29-1/-4 and the configuration must comply with
the gas performance parameters stated in the Installation Manual.
14.1 C-2 95-8533

14.1
C-3
95-8533
Figure C-1 (Drawing 007547-001)
APPENDIX D
Eagle Quantum Premier System
MARINE APPLICATIONS
U.S. COAST GUARD APPROVAL Number 161.002/49/0
Approved System Description

Refer to Table D-1 for a complete list of USCG approved equipment.
Table D-1— List of Approved Equipment
Equip. No. Manufacturer Equipment type Series/Model Description
EQ3XXXP N(C) N(S) W(T)-C, panel mount only;

installed inside Rittal cabinet or equivalent NEMA 12
1 Det-Tronics EQ3XXX Controller
enclosure in controlled environments;
NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
Optional module used in the Controller Redundancy
EQ3LTM configuration, installed inside Rittal cabinet or equivalent
2 Det-Tronics
LON Termination Module NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
EQ3710D(P) W, installed inside Rittal cabinet or
EQ3710AIM
3 Det-Tronics equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Analog Input Module
EQ3720D(P) W, installed inside Rittal cabinet or
EQ3720RM
4 Det-Tronics equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Relay Module
EQ3730EDIO EQ3730D(P) W(T); installed inside Rittal cabinet or
5 Det-Tronics Enhanced Discrete equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled environments;
Input/Output Module NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ3750ASHP W; panel mount only, installed inside Rittal
EQ3750ASH Addressable
6 Det-Tronics cabinet or equivalent NEMA 12 enclosure in controlled
Smoke & Heat Module
environments; NEMA 4X enclosure for open area installations.
EQ24xxNE Network EQ245(6) 3NE;
7 Det-Tronics
Extender Module Enclosure material: 5 – Aluminum, 6 –SS.
EQ22xxDCUEX Digital EQ225(6)3DCUEX;
8 Det-Tronics Communication Unit, Enclosure material: 5 – Aluminum, 6 –SS.
Combustible (Uses CGS Gas Sensor)
CGS Combustible Gas CGSS1A6C2R1X
9 Det-Tronics
Sensor (Used with the EQ22xxDCUEX)
PIRECLAx4
10 Det-Tronics PointWatch Hydrocarbon PIRECLA (1) 4 A (B) 1 (2) W (T) 1 (2)
Gas Detector
PIRECLAx4
PointWatch Hydrocar- PIRECLA (1) 4 A (B) 1 (2) W (T) 1 (2);
11 Det-Tronics
bon Gas Detector “Duct with DEC Q900C1001 Duct Mount kit
Mount”
Model GTXS N (M) W 4 (5) Transmitter
with Model GTSH2S 20P (50P,100P) Sensor
GT3000 or
12 Det-Tronics
Toxic Gas Detector Model GTSO2 25V Sensor
or
Model GTSCO 100P (500P) Sensor
14.1 D-1 95-8533

Table D-1— List of Approved Equipment (Continued)
Equip. No. Manufacturer Equipment type Series/Model Description
13 Det-Tronics UD10 Universal Display UD10A (S) 5N (5M) 25 (28) W 2

X3301 Multispectrum X3301A (S) 4N (4M) 11 (13, 14, 23) W (T) 1 (2) ;
14 Det-Tronics
Flame Detector with Q9033A Al (Q9033B SS) swivel
X3302 Multispectrum X3302A (S) 4N (4M) 11 (13, 14, 23) W 1 (2);
15 Det-Tronics
Flame Detector with Q9033A Al (Q9033B SS) swivel
STB Sensor STB4 (5) A (S) 2N (2U, 3N, 5N, 6N) W
16 Det-Tronics
Termination Box (Used with the Fenwal DAF Vertical Heat Detector)
EQ2220GFM Ground EQ2220GFM is installed in the same enclosure
17 Det-Tronics
Fault Monitor with EQ3XXX Controller
EQP2120PS-B Model Quint PS-100-240VAC/24VDC/20;
Phoenix Contact
18 Power Supply panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany)
(Discontinued) with EQ3XXX Controller
EQP2120PS-B Model QUINT PS-1AC/24 DC/20
Phoenix Contact
19 Power Supply panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany)
(Replacement) with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT PS-100-240 AC/24 DC/10EX
Phoenix Contact EQP2110PS-P
20 panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany) Power Supply
with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT PS-24 DC/24 DC/10
Phoenix Contact EQP2410PS-P
21 panel mount only, installed in the same enclosure
(Germany) Converter
with EQ3XXX Controller
Model QUINT-DIODE/40; panel mount only;
Phoenix Contact QUINT-DIODE/40Diode
22 installed in the same enclosure with EQ3XXX Controller
(Germany) Redundancy Module
and Approved Phoenix Power Supplies
Model 12-E27121-020-xx rated 140°F (60°C) {160°F
Kidde-Fenwal DAF
23 (71°C), 190°F (88°C), 225°F (107°C)};
(Fenwal) Vertical Heat Detector
used with STB Sensor Termination Box, item 15
THD-7052
24 Fenwal Uses 2-wire base 2WRLT.
Heat Detector
CPD-7054 Ionization
Type Smoke Detector
PSD-7157 and
PSD-7157D
Photoelectric Type
Smoke Detectors
27 Fenwal MT-12/24-R Horn 24 V dc model; installed in Fenwal IOB-R box.
MTWP-2475W – FR Multitone Weatherproof Horn-Strobe;
28 Fenwal
Horn/Strobe installed in Fenwal IOB-R box.
Model 84-330001-002 pull station;
Manual Call Stations
29 Fenwal uses Fenwal SGB-32S interior surface mount backbox
Series 3300
(compatible mounting with B-11).
RA-911 Remote Remote indicator for use with Fenwal Heat
30 Fenwal
Indicator or Smoke detectors.
Manual Fire Alarm Call
31 MEDC (UK) Model PB-UL-4C-6C-4-DC-D-7-R call point
Point PB Range
Uses CCH EAJC26 conduit outlet box with cover,
32* Cooper Crouse Hinds CCH ETH 2416 Horn
3/4 NPT hub size.
*Horn item 32 is for use in gas applications only.
14.1 D-2 95-8533

Applied Strobe AST-4-10-30-DC-CL-CM-75-ULC;
33 AST-4-1030 Strobe
Technology (Canada) with clear lenses
SL-2000-P; installed in Hoffman LWC204015SS6
Air Products & SL-2000-P
34 NEMA 4X enclosure; uses Apollo 55000-328A
Controls Duct Smoke Detector
photoelectric head w/ RW-268A base.
Apollo Fire Discovery Ionization Apollo P/N 58000-550NA
35
Detectors Ltd. Smoke Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Discovery Optical Apollo P/N 58000-650NA
36
Detectors Ltd. Smoke Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Discovery Multisensor Apollo P/N 58000-750NA
37
Detectors Ltd. Detector (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire Apollo P/N 58000-450NA
38 Discovery Heat Detector
Detectors Ltd. (with 4" Base Model P/N 45681-210)
Apollo Fire XP95A Sounder Control
39 Apollo P/N 55000-825NA
Detectors Ltd. Module
Apollo Fire
40 Mini Switch Monitor Apollo P/N 55000-765NA*
Detectors Ltd.
Apollo Fire Priority Mini Switch
41 Apollo P/N 55000-765NA*
Detectors Ltd. Monitor
* The device type depends on the priority switch setting on the device.
NA = North American Approvals
14.1 D-3 95-8533

IMPORTANT
The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110PS-P Power Supplies provide EQP System devices with power from input
supply 120 to 220 Vac. The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110PS-P Power Supplies are used in pairs where primary
source of input supply is connected to one and the secondary source is connected to the other. Use of these
power supplies may provide the source of the secondary supply. The EQP2410PS-P Converter provides the
EQP system with power from input supply 24 Vdc and provides the source if secondary supply only.
note
The customer may provide other sources of the secondary supply such as secondary source batteries, their
supervision or charging, or UPS. Per NFPA 72-2010 requirements, such power supply related requirements must
be separately provided for and be accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Hazardous Locations
Refer to Figure D-1 (Drawing 007545-001) for System Classification details.
System Specification
EQP2120PS-B POWER SUPPLY (Discontinued)—
Number of units: 16 (8 pairs) max
Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15%, +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Output voltage: Nominal– 24.5 Vdc ± 1% Vdc
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: Vout = 24.5 Vdc: 4.9 Amps @ 120 Vac
2.9 Amps @ 220 Vac.
Vout = 28.0 Vdc: 5.6 Amps @ 120 Vac
3.2 Amps @ 220 Vac.
Output current, each: 20 A
EQP2120PS-B POWER SUPPLY (Replacement)—

Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15%, +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 6.6 A max @120 Vac
3.6 A max @220 Vac.
14.1 D-4 95-8533

EQP2110PS-P POWER SUPPLY—
Input voltage: 120 – 220 Vac, -15% +10%, 60/50 Hz single phase
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 3.2 A max @120 Vac
1.7 A max @220 Vac
EQP2410PS-P Converter—
Input voltage: 24 Vdc, -15%, +10%
Range– 24.5….28.0 Vdc
Input current: 15.7 A max @ 24 Vdc.
QUINT-Diode/40 redundancy module

Number of units: 8 (2 Power Supplies can be connected to each module) max
Input voltage: 24.5….28.0 Vdc
IMPORTANT
The output voltage is adjustable. An even current distribution must be ensured by precisely setting all power
supply units that are operated in parallel to the same output voltage ±10 mV.
IMPORTANT
To ensure symmetrical current distribution it is recommended that all cable connections from all power supply
units/diode redundancy modules to the power distribution bus are the same length and have the same cross
section.
POWER REQUIREMENT—
Refer to Section 6 of this manual and individual device manuals for details.
NOTE
The Power Supplies, Converter, and Diode Redundancy Module electrical specifications for EQP marine
applications represent a reduction in the rating range with respect to that specified by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s published electrical specifications may be viewed as reference only.
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY RANGE—

See Table D-2 for details.
NOTE
The operating temperature and relative humidity specification of EQP System components including Power
Supplies, Converter, and Diode Redundancy Module in EQP marine applications represent a reduction in the
rating range for some components and an increase in the rating range for other components with respect to
that specified by their manufacturers. The manufacturer’s published operating temperature and relative humidity
specifications may be viewed as reference only.
14.1 D-5 95-8533

INSTALLATION—
The EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, EQP2110PS-P Power Supply, EQP2410PS-P Converter, and Diode
Redundancy Module are Panel mounted and intended to be installed within the same cabinet as the EQ3XXX
Controller of the EQP System. Note: Ensure sufficient convection. Refer to Phoenix Contact manuals as listed
below for additional installation and mounting details. For other EQP System components installation, operation
and maintenance refer to appropriate sections of this manual and to individual device manuals.
Note
SHCS # 10-24 SST screws are recommended for the Power Supply and Diode Redundancy Module panel
mounting.
Note
Terminal End Brackets DEC P/N 000133-517 are recommended for use with EQ371(2)(3)0D (DIN rail mount)
and EQ2220GFM Modules.
Power Supply Supervision—

The EQP2120PS-B and EQP2110-P Power Supplies, and EQP2410PS-P Converter shall be monitored for
Trouble. The power supply provides an internal relay contact DC OK signal output, floating. All power supply unit
relay contacts shall be connected in series and connected to the EQ3730EDIO input. A Trouble signal will be
initiated in case of a power supply failure. The Trouble signal will not identify the specific power supply unit that
failed. See Figure D-2 for connecting diagram.
EQP SYSTEM MODEL 000523-009 & 000523-010

• The System consists of:
1 x EQP2120PS-B Power Supply, primary
2 x EQP2410PS-P Converter, secondary
2 x QUINT–DIODE/40 Redundancy module
1 x EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor
1 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-009)
0 x EQ3XXX Controller (000523-010)
0 x EQ3710AIM Module & 1 x EQ3730EDIO Module (000523-009)
2 x EQ3710AIM Modules & 2 x EQ3730EDIO Modules (000523-010)
• The System is mounted within 60H x 36W x 16D Stainless Steel (type 316), NRTL labeled NEMA 4X rated
enclosure. The enclosure shall be lockable by key lock or padlock.
• EQP system models 000523-009 & 000523-010 are suitable for Cl I, Div. 2, GRPS A, B, C & D (T4); Cl I, Zone 2,
GRP IIC (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Tamb = –20°C to +49°C.
• Modifications to enclosure (such as conduit entry holes, windows etc.) are permitted when implemented by the
manufacturer of the enclosure.
14.1 D-6 95-8533

ORDERING INFORMATION
POWER SUPPLY, DIODE, CONTROLLER, DUCT MOUNT KIT

DEC Part Number Model Description
Phoenix Contact
EQP2120PS-B
009929-001 QUINT–PS-100-240AC/24DC/20
(Discontinued)
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
EQP2120PS-B
010988-001 QUINT–PS-1AC/24DC/20
(Replacement)
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
010985-001 EQP2110PS-P QUINT–PS-100-240AC/24DC/10EX
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
010892-001 EQP2410PS-P QUINT–PS-24DC/24DC/10
Panel Mount
Phoenix Contact
009934-001 Diode Redundancy Module QUINT–DIODE/40
Panel Mount
EQP System Controller,
007609-269 EQ3XXXPCSW-C
panel mount
009931-001 Q900C1001 Duct Mount Kit
000523-009 000523-009 See description on page D-6
000523-010 000523-010 See description on page D-6
For other USCG Approved EQP System components, refer to Table D-1 or contact Det-Tronics Customer Service.
Refer to Section 3 of this manual for determining power requirements.
14.1 D-7 95-8533

Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges
Temperature & RH Non-Condensing

Installation Category
Installation in
Equip. No. Product consoles,
Controlled housings, etc.; Weather exposed
environment Non-weather areas (Salt mist)
protected or cold
locations
EQ3XXX Controller
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
1* with or without
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3LTM Module
EQ3710AIM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
2*
Analog Input Module 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3720RM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
3*
Relay Module 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ3730EDIO
Enhanced 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
4*
DiscreteInput/Output 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Module
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
5 EQ3750ASH
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQ24xxNE
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
6 Network Extender Mod-
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
ule
EQ22xxDCUEX Digital
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
7 Communication Unit,
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Combustible
CGS Combustible Gas 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
8
Sensor 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
PIRECLAx4
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
9 PointWatch Hydrocar-
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
bon Gas Detector
PIRECLAx4
PointWatch 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
10
Hydrocarbon Gas 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector “Duct Mount”
GT3000 0°C to +50°C -20°C to +50°C -20°C to +50°C
11
Toxic Gas Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
12 UD10 Universal Display
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
X3301
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
13 Multispectrum Flame
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector
X3302
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
14 Multispectrum Flame
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Detector
STB 0°C to +55vC -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
15
Sensor Termination Box 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
14.1 D-8 95-8533

Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges (Continued)

Installation in
protected or cold
locations
EQ2220GFM 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
16*
Ground Fault Monitor 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2120PS-B 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
17*
Power supply 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2110PS-P 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
18*
Power supply 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
EQP2410PS-P 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
19*
Converter 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
QUINT-
DIODE/40Diode 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +55°C
20*
redundancy 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
module
DAF Vertical Heat 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
21
Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
THD-7052 0°C to +55°C
22 N/A N/A
Heat Detector 5-95%RH
CPD-7054
0°C to +55°C
23 Ionization Type N/A N/A
5-95%RH
Smoke Detector
PSD-7157 and
PSD-7157D 0°C to +55°C
24 N/A N/A
Photoelectric Type 5-95%RH
Smoke Detectors
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
25 MT-12/24-R Horn N/A
5-95%RH 5-95%RH
MTWP-2475W – FR 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +55°C
26 N/A
Horn/Strobe 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Manual Call
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
27 Stations N/A
5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Series 3300
RA-911 0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C
28 N/A
Remote Indicator 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Manual Fire
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
29 Alarm Call Point
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
PB Range
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
30 CCH ETH 2416 Horn
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
14.1 D-9 95-8533

Table D-2—Temperature and Humidity Ranges (Continued)

Installation in
protected or cold
locations
0°C to +55°C -25°C to +70°C -25°C to +70°C
31 AST-4-1030 Strobe
5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
SL-2000-P Duct 0°C to +55°C 0°C to +70°C 0°C to +70°C
32
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH 5-95%RH 5-95%RH
Discovery Ionization 5°C to +55°C
33 N/A N/A
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH
Discovery Optical 5°C to +55°C
34 N/A N/A
Smoke Detector 5-95%RH
Discovery Multisensor 5°C to +55°C
35 N/A N/A
Detector 5-95%RH
5°C to +55°C
36 Discovery Heat Detector N/A N/A
5-95%RH
XP95A Sounder Control 5°C to +55°C
37 N/A N/A
Module 5-95%RH
5°C to +55°C
38 Mini Switch Monitor N/A N/A
5-95%RH
Priority Mini Switch 5°C to +55°C
39 N/A N/A
Monitor 5-95%RH
* For use in controlled environment, install in NEMA 12 rated enclosure or cabinet.

For use in non-weather protected, cold and salt mist exposed areas, install in NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure or cabinet.
14.1 D-10 95-8533

14.1
D-11
Figure D1— System Drawing 007545-001
95-8533
14.1
TO EDIO
PS 1 PS PS PS n
– – – –
L PHOENIX L PHOENIX L PHOENIX L PHOENIX
QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS – QUINT-PS –
N N N N
+ + + +
DC + DC + DC + DC +
13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK 13 14 OK
A2555
D-12
Note: Contacts are closed during normal operation. The circuit shall be wired to an input on the EQP system (EDIO).
In Logic, the selected input must be inverted and used to activate an alarm trigger gate, which initiates a
fault message on the Controller and activates the fault relay output.
No supervision is necessary, since the EDIO modules must be installed in the same cabinet with EQP21X0PS
and EQP2410PS.
Figure D-2—Power Supply and Converter Relays Wired in Series for Trouble Monitoring (up to 16 Power Supplies/Converters)
95-8533
APPENDIX E
CE Mark
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC details

The Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System was tested and found to be compliant with
EN61000-6-2, EN61000-6-4, EN50130-4, and EN50270. The following considerations must be given for installation
of the Eagle Quantum Premier system.
• For shielded cable installed in conduit, attach the wire shields to the “shield” connections on the terminal blocks, or
to the earth ground on the case.
• For installations without conduit, use double shielded cable. Terminate the outer shield to the earth ground on the
case. Terminate the inner shield to the “shield” connection on the terminal blocks.
Additional Directives
• ATEX Directive: 94/9/EC

Refer to Appendix C for details.
• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC
• WEEE Directive: 2002/96/EC
14.1 B-1
E-1 95-8533
APPENDIX F
Rocker Switch Table

Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 X O O O O O O O 61 X O X X X X O O
2 O X O O O O O O 62 O X X X X X O O
3 X X O O O O O O 63 X X X X X X O O
4 O O X O O O O O 64 O O O O O O X O
5 X O X O O O O O 65 X O O O O O X O
6 O X X O O O O O 66 O X O O O O X O
7 X X X O O O O O 67 X X O O O O X O
8 O O O X O O O O 68 O O X O O O X O
9 X O O X O O O O 69 X O X O O O X O
10 O X O X O O O O 70 O X X O O O X O
11 X X O X O O O O 71 X X X O O O X O
12 O O X X O O O O 72 O O O X O O X O
13 X O X X O O O O 73 X O O X O O X O
14 O X X X O O O O 74 O X O X O O X O
15 X X X X O O O O 75 X X O X O O X O
16 O O O O X O O O 76 O O X X O O X O
17 X O O O X O O O 77 X O X X O O X O
18 O X O O X O O O 78 O X X X O O X O
19 X X O O X O O O 79 X X X X O O X O
20 O O X O X O O O 80 O O O O X O X O
21 X O X O X O O O 81 X O O O X O X O
22 O X X O X O O O 82 O X O O X O X O
23 X X X O X O O O 83 X X O O X O X O
24 O O O X X O O O 84 O O X O X O X O
25 X O O X X O O O 85 X O X O X O X O
26 O X O X X O O O 86 O X X O X O X O
27 X X O X X O O O 87 X X X O X O X O
28 O O X X X O O O 88 O O O X X O X O
29 X O X X X O O O 89 X O O X X O X O
30 O X X X X O O O 90 O X O X X O X O
31 X X X X X O O O 91 X X O X X O X O
32 O O O O O X O O 92 O O X X X O X O
33 X O O O O X O O 93 X O X X X O X O
34 O X O O O X O O 94 O X X X X O X O
35 X X O O O X O O 95 X X X X X O X O
36 O O X O O X O O 96 O O O O O X X O
37 X O X O O X O O 97 X O O O O X X O
38 O X X O O X O O 98 O X O O O X X O
39 X X X O O X O O 99 X X O O O X X O
40 O O O X O X O O 100 O O X O O X X O
41 X O O X O X O O 101 X O X O O X X O
42 O X O X O X O O 102 O X X O O X X O
43 X X O X O X O O 103 X X X O O X X O
44 O O X X O X O O 104 O O O X O X X O
45 X O X X O X O O 105 X O O X O X X O
46 O X X X O X O O 106 O X O X O X X O
47 X X X X O X O O 107 X X O X O X X O
48 O O O O X X O O 108 O O X X O X X O
49 X O O O X X O O 109 X O X X O X X O
50 O X O O X X O O 110 O X X X O X X O
51 X X O O X X O O 111 X X X X O X X O
52 O O X O X X O O 112 O O O O X X X O
53 X O X O X X O O 113 X O O O X X X O
54 O X X O X X O O 114 O X O O X X X O
55 X X X O X X O O 115 X X O O X X X O
56 O O O X X X O O 116 O O X O X X X O
57 X O O X X X O O 117 X O X O X X X O
58 O X O X X X O O 118 O X X O X X X O
59 X X O X X X O O 119 X X X O X X X O
60 O O X X X X O O 120 O O O X X X X O
14.1 F-1 95-8533

Rocker Switch Table
Node Rocker Switch Node Rocker Switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
121 X O O X X X X O 191 X X X X X X O X
122 O X O X X X X O 192 O O O O O O X X
123 X X O X X X X O 193 X O O O O O X X
124 O O X X X X X O 194 O X O O O O X X
125 X O X X X X X O 195 X X O O O O X X
126 O X X X X X X O 196 O O X O O O X X
127 X X X X X X X O 197 X O X O O O X X
128 O O O O O O O X 198 O X X O O O X X
129 X O O O O O O X 199 X X X O O O X X
130 O X O O O O O X 200 O O O X O O X X
131 X X O O O O O X 201 X O O X O O X X
132 O O X O O O O X 202 O X O X O O X X
133 X O X O O O O X 203 X X O X O O X X
134 O X X O O O O X 204 O O X X O O X X
135 X X X O O O O X 205 X O X X O O X X
136 O O O X O O O X 206 O X X X O O X X
137 X O O X O O O X 207 X X X X O O X X
138 O X O X O O O X 208 O O O O X O X X
139 X X O X O O O X 209 X O O O X O X X
140 O O X X O O O X 210 O X O O X O X X
141 X O X X O O O X 211 X X O O X O X X
142 O X X X O O O X 212 O O X O X O X X
143 X X X X O O O X 213 X O X O X O X X
144 O O O O X O O X 214 O X X O X O X X
145 X O O O X O O X 215 X X X O X O X X
146 O X O O X O O X 216 O O O X X O X X
147 X X O O X O O X 217 X O O X X O X X
148 O O X O X O O X 218 O X O X X O X X
149 X O X O X O O X 219 X X O X X O X X
150 O X X O X O O X 220 O O X X X O X X
151 X X X O X O O X 221 X O X X X O X X
152 O O O X X O O X 222 O X X X X O X X
153 X O O X X O O X 223 X X X X X O X X
154 O X O X X O O X 224 O O O O O X X X
155 X X O X X O O X 225 X O O O O X X X
156 O O X X X O O X 226 O X O O O X X X
157 X O X X X O O X 227 X X O O O X X X
158 O X X X X O O X 228 O O X O O X X X
159 X X X X X O O X 229 X O X O O X X X
160 O O O O O X O X 230 O X X O O X X X
161 X O O O O X O X 231 X X X O O X X X
162 O X O O O X O X 232 O O O X O X X X
163 X X O O O X O X 233 X O O X O X X X
164 O O X O O X O X 234 O X O X O X X X
165 X O X O O X O X 235 X X O X O X X X
166 O X X O O X O X 236 O O X X O X X X
167 X X X O O X O X 237 X O X X O X X X
168 O O O X O X O X 238 O X X X O X X X
169 X O O X O X O X 239 X X X X O X X X
170 O X O X O X O X 240 O O O O X X X X
171 X X O X O X O X 241 X O O O X X X X
172 O O X X O X O X 242 O X O O X X X X
173 X O X X O X O X 243 X X O O X X X X
174 O X X X O X O X 244 O O X O X X X X
175 X X X X O X O X 245 X O X O X X X X
176 O O O O X X O X 246 O X X O X X X X
177 X O O O X X O X 247 X X X O X X X X
178 O X O O X X O X 248 O O O X X X X X
179 X X O O X X O X 249 X O O X X X X X
180 O O X O X X O X 250 O X O X X X X X
181 X O X O X X O X
182 O X X O X X O X
183 X X X O X X O X
184 O O O X X X O X O = OPEN / OFF
185 X O O X X X O X
186 O X O X X X O X X = CLOSED / ON
187 X X O X X X O X
188 O O X X X X O X
189 X O X X X X O X
190 O X X X X X O X
14.1 F-2 95-8533
APPENDIX G
Device Model MatricES
CONTROLLER MODEL MATRIX

MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3001 EQP Controller - 246 Nodes
EQ3005 EQP Controller - 246 Nodes (Customer Specific Configuration)
TYPE MOUNTING OPTION
D Din Rail
P Panel Mount
TYPE COM Board 1
N None
C ControlNet
TYPE COM Board 2
N None
S Serial Port Expansion
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
R Russian
S SIL
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX*/CE/IECEx
T-C T plus US Coast Guard
W FM/CSA/ATEX*/CE/IECEx
W-C W plus US Coast Guard
*Component Certification
**Type "APPROVALS" can use one or more letters to designate the approvals of the product.
Some configurations are not available. Check with factory for additional information.
For USCG approved controller models, refer to Appendix D.
NOTE: Contact Customer Service when ordering replacement EQ3XXX Controllers for redundant systems.
14.1 G-1 95-8533

EDIO MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3730 8 Channel Enhanced Discrete Input/Output (EDIO) Module
D DIN Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
R Russian
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX*/CE/IECEx
DCIO MODEL MATRIX

MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3700 8 Channel Discrete Input/Output (DCIO) Module
D DIN Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
R Russian
IPM MODEL MATRIX

MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3740 Intelligent Protection Module (IPM)
D DIN Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
W FM/CSA/ATEX*/CE
14.1 G-2 95-8533

AIM MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3710 8 Channel Analog Input (AIM) Module
D Din Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
R Russian
RELAY MODULE MODEL MATRIX

MODEL DESCRIPTION
EQ3720 8 Channel Relay Module (RM)
D Din Rail
P Panel
TYPE APPROVALS**
A FM/CSA
C CSA
E ATEX*/CE
F FM
14.1 G-3 95-8533

Safety Manual 95-8599
Eagle Quantum Premier ®
SIL 2 Rated Fire & Gas System
5.1 Rev: 3/13 95-8599

Table Of Contents
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Quality Policy Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Document Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EQP System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EQP Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EQP Safety Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
EQP Safety Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
EQPSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
X3301-SIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Model PIRECL-SIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
AIM-SIL Analog Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
EDIO-SIL Enhanced Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
S3 Configuration Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PROOF TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EDIO Input Channel Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EDIO Output Channel Proof Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
AIM Input Channel Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
X3301 Visual Field Inspection Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
X3301 Magnetic Oi Proof Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PIRECL Visual Field Inspection Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PIRECL Gas Response Proof Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
EQP User Logic Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Commissioning Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SUITABLE APPLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Application Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
APPENDIX A – SUMMARY OF SAFETY RELATED DATA . . . . . . . . . . 16
Appendix B – EQP Controller logic gate table. . . . . . . . . . 19

safety manual
Eagle Quantum Premier ®

SIL 2 Rated Fire & Gas System
Note It will be necessary to satisfy the full requirements

Where a definition of the term or abbreviation of IEC 61508, and for Process Industry applications,
is given in IEC 61508-4 “Definitions and the requirements of IEC 61511, in order to use the
Abbreviations”, the definition from the standard is Det-Tronics EQP Safety System in safety-related
given first in quotation marks, followed by further applications.
explanation if this is necessary.
Further, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure
that the EQP Safety System is suitable for the chosen
INTRODUCTION application and complies with the appropriate
application standards.
This Safety Manual describes the actions that must be
taken to use the Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier®
QUALITY POLICY STATEMENT
(EQP) Safety System in safety-related applications.
All quality assurance control measures necessary for
The actions that are described can be either technical safety management as specified in IEC 61508 Part
or procedural. For example, a procedural action 1 have been implemented. The quality management
would be the need to maintain password protection system of Det-Tronics is based on the requirements
of configuration programs, so that non-approved staff of EN ISO 9001 and ANSI/ASQC Q9001 through the
cannot modify these. application of the United Technologies Company
Achieving Competitive Excellence (ACE) program. In
This document is limited to those actions that are addition, the Quality Management System complies
required to ensure compliance with the relevant safety with the European ATEX Directive requirements per EN
certifications and standards. Other documents such 13980, the International Electrotechnical Commission
as Manuals and Data Sheets must be referred to for requirements per OD005/V2, and the supervised testing
information outside the scope of this document. These requirements per ISO 17025.
documents can be found on the Det-Tronics website
www.det-tronics.com.
SCOPE
The Safety Manual is approved and certified by exida® The Det-Tronics EQP Safety System is intended for use
as part of the overall EQP Safety System. Satisfying the as part of a programmable electronic system as defined
requirements it describes is a necessary part of using by IEC 61508. It is suitable for low demand safety
the EQP Safety System in safety-related applications. functions up to safety integrity level 2 (SIL 2).
Failure to complete the actions described in this The safety critical functions for the EQP Safety System
document would contravene the cer tification include the following:
requirements. – Fire input from X3301 and/or EDIO and/or AIM
Completing the actions described in this document will – Gas alarm from PIRECL and/or EDIO and/or AIM
only satisfy some of the requirements defined by IEC – Annunciation/Release from EDIO
61508 for safety-related applications. – System logic for processing and mapping inputs and
outputs.
5.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2013 Rev: 3/13 95-8599

The safety related functions of the EQP Safety System PRODUCT OVERVIEW
include the following:
– Trouble annunciation for compromised safety function EQP SYSTEM
by de-energizing the Controller’s Trouble relay
The EQP System (on which the Det-Tronics EQP Safety
– Digital input for lockout of inhibits. System is based) was originally developed to meet the
requirements of industrial fire and gas detection and
The EQP Safety System employs a 1oo1D (i.e. 1 out of mitigation. The system comprises (see Figure 1):
1 with diagnostics) architecture to achieve SIL 2. EQP
Safety Controllers may be used in redundant mode to
increase system availability, but this is not required for • Input / output modules
the safety-related performance of the system. • Field devices for fire and gas detection
• Controllers which can be programmed to carry out the
Configuring and programming the EQP Safety System control of the fire and gas system
must be via a software program known as Safety System
Software (S3). • Power supplies and other miscellaneous hardware
• S3 software which is used to configure the system and
In addition to completing the actions specifically related to generate the logic programs which will be run by
to the EQP Safety System, it is necessary to satisfy the the Controllers
wider requirements of IEC 61508. This includes such • A proprietary protocol known as Eagle Quantum
elements within the framework of the safety lifecycle, Premier Safety Loop (EQPSL), which provides
such as hazard and risk analysis and defining the safety communication between field devices and the
instrumented function. This work must be carried out Controllers.
through appropriate and competent Safety Management
procedures and staff. NOTE
For additional information regarding set-up and
DOCUMENT STRUCTURE installation of the EQP system, refer to the EQP
system manual, form number 95-8533.
This Safety Manual describes the actions that must
be taken to use the Det-Tronics EQP Safety System in
safety-related applications. The main sections are as EQP SAFETY SYSTEM
follows: The Det-Tronics EQP Safety System uses the following
specifically developed components (see Figure 2):
Introduction • EQ3XXX – EQP Controller
Product Overview gives an overview of the Det-Tronics • EQ3730EDIO – Enhanced Discrete Input/Output
product range in general and the EQP Safety products in (EDIO) Module
particular. • EQ3710AIM – Analog Input Module
Proof Testing describes the proof testing that is • X3301 – Multispectrum IR Flame Detector
necessary. • PIRECL – Infrared Gas Detector
Suitable Applications describes the use of the The data required to establish the suitability of the EQP
Det‑Tronics EQP Safety System in practical applications. Safety System for safety-related applications is given in
Included are failure rate data and PFDavg calculations. Appendix A of this Safety Manual.
Appendix A provides a summary of the essential data EQP Safety System components and standard
for safety applications for the Det-Tronics EQP Safety components can be used together. The non-safety
System. certified components are classed as non-interfering. A
list of all the devices available for the EQP system is
Appendix B gives logic instructions and their restrictions maintained at www.det-tronics.com and is shown below.
for low demand SIL 2 applications.
5.1 2 95-8599
5. UV Flame Detector 8. Hydrocarbon Combustible
4. UV/IR Hydrocarbon Flame Detector Gas Detector with Display
22. Flame Detector with 3. Single Frequency IR 7. H2S Gas Sensor with Display
Explosion-Proof Hydrocarbon Flame Detector 9. Combustible Gas Open Path Detector
Camera 2. Multispectrum IR
Hydrogen Flame Detector 6. Toxic Gas Detector with Display
1. Multispectrum IR 10. Hydrocarbon Combustible
Hydrocarbon Flame Detector Gas Detector
14. Local Operating Network/

19. Signal Audible Module Signaling Line Circuit 12. Discrete Inputs and Outputs Module
18. Relay Output Module
13. Single-Fire-Hazard Supression Module
17. Analog (4-20 mA) Input Module
21. Surveillance Digital Video
Recorder and Remote Station
16. Redundant Safety System Controllers
11. Combustible Gas Detector
Links to 3rd-Party Control

System or PLC Interface to ControlNet and Modbus
20. Explosion-Proof
Camera 15. Operator Station
and Software
Figure 1—Components of a Det-Tronics EQP System
Non-Interfering Modules
• EQ2400NE – Network Extender • EQ2200UVIR – Ultraviolet/Infrared Flame Detector

• EQ2400PLR – Physical Layer Repeater • EQ2200DCU – Digital Communication Unit
• EQ3LTM LON Termination Module (Redundant • EQ2200DCUEX – Discrete Control Unit with Catalytic
Controllers Only) Gas Sensor
• 008981-001 Controller to Controller High Speed Serial • EQ2200IDC – Initiating Device Circuit
Cable (Redundant Controllers Only) • EQ2200IDCSC – Initiating Device Circuit Short Circuit
• EQPSL Network Cables – Refer to cable specification • EQ2500ARM – Agent Release Module
information in the EQP system manual (form 95-8533).
• EQ2500SAM – Signal Audible Module
• EQ3700DCIO – Discrete Input/Output Module
• EQ2100PSM – Power Supply Monitor
• EQ3720RM – Relay Module
• EQ2220GFM – Ground Fault Monitor
• EQ3750 – Addressable Smoke and Heat Module
• 008056-001 – HART Interface Module
• X2200UV – Ultraviolet Flame Detector
• OPECL – Open Path Eclipse Gas Detector
• X5200UVIR – Ultraviolet/Infrared Flame Detector
• FlexVu UD10 Universal Display Module
• X9800IR – Infrared Flame Detector
• EQ2200UV – Ultraviolet Flame Detector
• EQ2200UVHT – High Temperature Ultraviolet Flame Configuration Software
Detector
• Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3)
5.1 3 95-8599
EQP Safety System Component Overview Safety Certified Product Identification
Figure 2 gives an overview of the role that each element All safety certified EQP System modules are clearly
of the EQP Safety System has in implementing the safety identified as such on the product label.
function.
X3301 MULTISPECTRUM IR FLAME MODEL PIRECL IR COMBUSTIBLE GAS EDIO SAFETY MODULE CONFIGURED EDIO SAFETY MODULE CONFIGURED
DETECTOR IS A SINGLE INPUT DEVICE DETECTOR IS A SINGLE INPUT DEVICE FOR DIGITAL INPUTS. MONITORS THE FOR DIGITAL OUTPUTS. OBEYS
SUITABLE IN LOW DEMAND SIL 2 SUITABLE IN LOW DEMAND SIL 2 INPUTS AND ALSO CHECKS FOR LINE COMMANDS TO SET THE OUTPUTS
SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEMS. SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEMS. FAULTS. INTERNAL DIAGNOSTICS SENT BY THE CONTROLLER. INTERNAL
CHECK THAT THE MODULE IS DIAGNOSTICS CHECK THAT THE
OPERATING CORRECTLY. MODULE IS OPERATING CORRECTLY.
IF A FAULT IS DETECTED, OUTPUTS
WILL BE SET TO THEIR SAFE STATE
OF HOLD LAST STATE.
EQP SAFETY CONTROLLER – RUNS THE

SAFETY APPLICATION PROGRAM AND
CARRIES OUT DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS TO
ENSURE IT IS OPERATING CORRECTLY. AIM SAFETY MODULE MONITORS
IF A FAULT IS DETECTED, IT WILL BE 4-20 mA ANALOG INPUTS. INTERNAL
INDICATED BY DE-ENERGIZING THE DIAGNOSTICS CHECK THAT THE
D2343
TROUBLE RELAY. MODULE IS OPERATING CORRECTLY.
Figure 2—Det-Tronics EQP Safety System Component Overview
5.1 4 95-8599
EQP SAFETY CONTROLLERS Communication with Remote Modbus Devices
The EQP Safety Controllers share a common hardware EQP Safety Controllers can read or write data to Remote
and software platform with standard EQP Controllers. Modbus devices. Any data read from such devices
The SIL rated version of the Controller conducts is not safety-related and shall not be used to block or
additional diagnostic checks and annunciates additional disable safety-related logic.
fault conditions.
EQP Controller Inhibit Lockout
Safety compliance is assured by additional diagnostics,
which detect failures and take appropriate action should Device inhibits allow input and output signals to be
errors be detected. blocked to allow the user to perform maintenance and
testing without affecting system outputs. Example: If a
If the EQP Safety Controller detects a “dangerous” flame detector is inhibited, a flame can be presented to
fault in itself (i.e. one that would prevent the EQP the detector and the fire alarm will not be registered by
Safety System from carrying out its safety function) it the controller. Subsequently, no action will be performed
will de‑energize the trouble relay. The fault causing by the controller. Therefore inhibits are classified as a
the Controller’s trouble relay to de-energize must be safety related issue. If a device is inhibited, it will no
investigated and corrected within the time period longer perform its safety function. For this reason, there
determined by SIF verification calculations for the is a global inhibit lockout feature.
particular application.
Input channel four of the safety controller is designated
as the inhibit lockout channel. The channel must be
Run Mode
configured as “Inhibit Enabled” via the EQP controller
Run Mode is the state in which the Det-Tronics EQP configuration screen in the S3 software. A normally open
Safety System is acting as a safety-related system and switch must be wired to channel four to perform the
carrying out its safety function. When the system is in inhibit enable function. When the switch is open, inhibits
this state, it is not possible to make modifications to are not allowed. When the switch is closed, inhibits can
configuration parameters or control logic. be activated from the controller via user configured logic
or from the individual device point displays on the S 3
software.
Program Mode
The system enters Program Mode when configuration When the inhibit lockout switch changes state, it is
parameters are downloaded to the system. The logged in the EQP controller. Additionally, individual
Controller trouble relay is de-energized while in this devices are logged when they are put into the inhibit
mode as an indication. When the EQP System is in state.
Program Mode, the user is responsible for maintaining a
safe state. It is the user’s responsibility to create and enforce an
appropriate lockout policy for the site.
NOTE
When there is a change of configuration, the user is
required to perform a validation test of the change.
Safe and Non-interfering Data

An EQP application program can read data from
safety‑related and non-interfering sources. Data from
non‑interfering sources must not be used in logic to
block or disable safety-related signals in the safety
loop. For example, data coming into the system from
a non‑interfering field device should not be used to
block or disable an alarm output, but It could be used to
activate a common alarm used by safety-related logic.
5.1 5 95-8599
EQP Safety Controller Diagnostic Checks EQP SAFETY DEVICES
The EQP Safety Controller automatically carries out a EQP Safety rated field devices share many of the same
number of diagnostic checks on a continuous basis. A attributes as standard EQP devices. They have the same
number of other diagnostic tests are also conducted physical form factor and are connected to the system in
to ensure the integrity of the EQPSL communication the same manner as standard devices. However, SIL
network and proper operation of the user’s logic versions of field devices are not directly interchangeable
program. with the standard versions. Each version has a unique
ID. Each field device must be configured for the
All checks conducted by the Controller are completed at proper type of device or a trouble is annunciated. SIL
least once an hour. This period is called the diagnostic rated devices differ from the standard modules in that
test interval. they perform additional software diagnostic checks
specifically designed for safety‑related applications. SIL
Note rated Controllers and EDIOs have red labels for easy
Other devices have different diagnostic test identification. A mixture of SIL and non‑SIL rated field
intervals. See EQP Safety Device Diagnostics. Be devices can be used on the system at the same time,
sure to account for this in calculations. however, non‑SIL rated devices shall not block or inhibit
the safety function in user logic.
The certifying authority that has granted the Det‑Tronics
EQP Safety System approval for use in low demand Self‑detected failures of the diagnostics will result in
SIL 2 safety-related applications has confirmed the a fault state where the condition is reported to the
completeness of the diagnostic tests. The user program controller and annunciated to the user. Depending on
requires no additional on-line diagnostic tests. Proof the type of fault, the field device may restart and attempt
testing, which is the responsibility of the user, is to re-establish communication with the controller.
discussed in the “Proof Testing” section of this manual.
EQPSL
Redundant EQP Safety Controllers
The EQP controller and associated field devices are
Using Det-Tronics EQP Safety Controllers in redundant connected via the EQPSL communication loop. Only
mode will increase their availability, but will have no EQP system approved devices can be connected to
effect on their ability to perform a safety-related function. EQPSL network (closed network). Devices from other
The redundant controller system is certified for use as manufacturers shall not be connected to the EQPSL.
part of a SIL 2 system. Special test pattern messages are periodically sent end
to end on the EQPSL to detect faults in the transceivers
When a second Controller is added for redundancy, the and memory buffers.
firmware versions must match. Controllers configured
for redundant operation operate in either Master or Extensive diagnostics are implemented in the EQPSL
Standby mode. Refer to the EQP system manual to detect degraded conditions and ensure that reliable
(number 95‑8533) for more details regarding controller communications are available when needed to respond
redundancy set-up. to a demand. This is especially important as Fire and
Gas systems are traditionally energize to trip and it is,
note therefore, unacceptable for them to trip based on loss of
Both the master and standby controllers must be power or network communications.
SIL rated models. If a SIL rated controller is paired
with a standard controller model, a redundancy The EQPSL physical network topology is limited to a
fault will be indicated. single loop which starts and ends at the Controller. The
system is automatically configured to utilize less than
50% of the available bandwidth in normal operation.
The additional bandwidth may be utilized by the system
in transient situations involving heavy message traffic.
Safety communications were evaluated in terms of
probability of failure on demand consistent with an IEC
61508 low demand application.
5.1 6 95-8599
EQP Safety Device Diagnostics The SIL AIM module provides eight channels of
configurable analog input. The AIM Module is specially
The EQP Safety devices (EDIO/AIM/X3301/Eclipse)
designed to meet the requirements of IEC 61508 and
automatically carry out a number of diagnostic checks
expands the input capability of the Det-Tronics Eagle
on a continuous basis. All checks are completed at
Quantum Premier System.
least once every two hours (diagnostic test interval).
Each channel of the AIM safety module is an input that
Failure of any field device diagnostic will cause the
can accept analog devices such as gas detectors. It is
trouble relay on the Controller to open. It is the user’s
the responsibility of the user to select suitable SIL rated
responsibility to determine what course of action is
devices to connect to the AIM.
appropriate for their situation when the Controller’s
trouble relay opens.
The EQP Controller continuously monitors the status of
the AIM. Input channels are supervised for out of range
The internal diagnostic tests carried out by EQP Safety
signals.
devices are sufficient to meet the requirements for use in
a low demand SIL 2 safety function. Proof testing, which
is the responsibility of the user, is discussed in the “Proof Input Range and Configuration
Testing” section of this manual.
The user shall enable out-of-range checking, with the
out-of-range low value configured to be at least 1mA,
X3301-SIL and the out-of-range high value to be less than 24
mA and less than or equal to the connected device
The SIL EQP Model X3301 flame detectors are
maximum output minus safety accuracy.
configured with the use of S3 software and the device
is safety rated at all available sensitivity settings. The
All AIM channels intended for use must be configured
fire alarm status should be used as the safety input
and downloaded from the EQP controller, otherwise they
signal for user logic. System “Proof Testing” should be
will be ignored.
conducted after any change in configuration is made.
For complete information regarding system overview,
note
installation, operation, specifications, and configuration
Refer to the X3301 Safety Manual (number
of the AIM Analog Input Module, refer to the AIM Module
9 5 - 8 5 8 2 ) fo r s p e c i fi c re q u i re m e n t s a n d
specification data sheet 90-1183 and/or the EQP
recommendations applicable to the proper
instruction manual number 95-8533.
installation, operation, and maintenance of all
SIL‑Certified X3301 IR flame detectors.
EDIO-SIL Enhanced Digital Input/Output
Module
Model pirecl-SIL
The SIL EDIO module provides eight channels of
The SIL EQP Model PIRECL combustible gas detectors
configurable digital input or output. The EDIO Module
are configured via S3 software and the device is safety
is specially designed to meet the requirements of IEC
rated. High and low alarm status should be used as the
61508 and expands the input and output capability
safety input signal for user logic. The floating point gas
of the Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier System.
concentration value is available for information, but is not
The EQP Controller continuously monitors the status
safety rated and should not be used as part of the safety
of the EDIO and controls the outputs with EQPSL
function. System “Proof Testing” should be conducted
communications.
after any change in configuration is made.
Each channel of the EDIO safety module can be
note
configured as an input to accept fire detection devices
Refer to the Model PIRECL Safety Manual
such as manual alarm stations, or as an output for
(number 95-8630) for specific requirements
signaling or releasing. Both input and output circuits
and recommendations applicable to the proper
can be configured for supervised (line monitoring) or
installation, operation, and maintenance of all
unsupervised operation. Channels are only SIL rated
SIL‑Certified PIRECL IR gas detectors.
when configured for the supervised mode of operation.
Unsupervised channels can be used for non-safety
AIM-SIL Analog Input Module related uses and are considered non-interfering. It is
the responsibility of the user to select suitable SIL rated
The SIL AIM module is configured via S3 software and
I/O devices to connect to the EDIO.
the device is safety rated. High and low alarm status
should be used as the safety input signal for user logic.
5.1 7 95-8599
This table indicates which EDIO channel configurations POWER SUPPLIES
are IEC 61508 SIL rated.
The power supply selected must provide over-voltage
protection to the EQP System. The over-voltage
Definition SIL Rated protection must be set for a maximum of 33 Vdc.
Unsupervised Input No
Unsupervised Output No The EQP Safety System is NFPA-72 certified for use
with Det-Tronics EQP Power Supplies, power supply
Smoke Detector No
monitoring, and ground fault monitoring.
Class A Output Yes
Class A Input Yes Redundant power supplies can be implemented by
Solenoid Output Yes “pairing” supplies. This is not required for the certified
safety integrity level, but will improve availability.
Class A Solenoid Output Yes
Class A Smoke Detector Input No The EQPSL devices must be operated between 18 and
Class B Output with Monitoring Yes 30 Vdc. A 10% overvoltage will not damage the devices.
Class B Input with Monitoring Yes
S3 CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
Detailed information regarding the use of the EQP
S 3 Software is an engineering tool for configuring
EDIO Safety Module is given in the appropriate data
parameters and writing control programs (known as
sheets and user documentation (EQP instruction manual
Projects) that are downloaded to EQP Controllers. The
number 95-8533). The information given here only
creation of the Project is the responsibility of the user
refers to the safety-related aspects of the module.
and must conform with the restrictions in this manual.
Outputs from the EQP Safety EDIO Module are normally
This Section describes the features of S 3 Software
de-energized and are energized on command by the
applicable to the EQP Safety System. More general
Controller (for example to release an extinguishant by
information regarding the operation and use of S3 can
opening a normally closed solenoid valve). Outputs will
be found in the S3 manual (number 95-8560).
hold last state on loss of communication with the controller.
A summary of S 3 Software features specific to its use
Det-Tronics S 3 Safety System Software is used for
with EQP Safety Systems is given below.
device configuration.
• Only input data from safety approved field devices
EDIO Digital Input Channel (X3301-SIL/Eclipse-SIL/EDIO-SIL/AIM-SIL) can be
A change in input state is only recognized if the new used as safety data in EQP Safety Logic.
input state is held for a filter time interval to ensure that • Safety-related inputs and outputs are colored red to
noise is not incorrectly interpreted as a change in the distinguish them from non-safety related I/O.
input state. The input must be active for at least 750
• User function blocks that are suitable for safety-related
milliseconds in order to be recognized.
data are colored red to distinguish them from functions
that are not suitable for safety-related data.
For descriptions and examples of how to provide open,
and open/short circuit monitoring, and Class A or Class • Floating point values are not safety rated and must not
B wiring on EDIO inputs, refer to the Installation section be used in the safety-related logic.
of the EQP Instruction Manual, 95-8533. Refer to • Numeric calculations are not error checked for overflow
Appendix A for the different lDU values for open versus or underflow and the results of such calculations are
open and short circuit monitoring. not defined. It is the user’s responsibility to bound
inputs so such a condition cannot happen.
EDIO Digital Output Channel • Change control logging and event recording are
available within S3 and EQP Safety Controllers.
The EDIO output channel is normally de-energized and
must employ line supervision to be safety rated.
While S3 is acceptable for configuring a low demand SIL
2 EQP System, it shall not be part of the safety function.
For descriptions and examples of how to provide open,
and open/short circuit monitoring, and Class A or
Class B wiring on EDIO outputs, refer to the Installation
section of the EQP Instruction Manual, 95-8533. Refer
to Appendix A for the lDU value for open and open and
short circuit monitoring.
5.1 8 95-8599
S3 Password Protection Restricted Access Enabled
The user must define what measures are to be applied to This feature is intended to give limited access of the
protect against project changes. S3 provides safeguards EQP port configurations for viewing and documentation
described in the following paragraphs. purposes.
Access to the S 3 software program is restricted by User accounts can be created with only the “restricted
password protection. Passwords can be changed at any access” checkbox selected, or combined with the
time by the user with correct privileges. other checkboxes — configure system, quit online, port
diagnostics.
S 3 supports up to 63 unique user accounts, each
capable of having a different password and access
S3 Change Control Log
privileges. These user accounts are controlled by the S3
system administrator. S3 maintains a Configuration Log that records changes in
the master project file. The log can be viewed from S3.
Configuring User Accounts
A record is made in the Configuration Log when:
There are five parameters that are used to configure the • IO Modules are added, deleted, or moved
users account.
• Tags are added to, removed from, or moved within an
IO Module
User Level
• IO Configuration parameters are saved
A user level between 0 and 65535 is used to determine • External node numbers are entered or modified
what a user can do. Each command or button that a
user can interact with in S3 has a user level assigned to • Serial communications parameters are entered or
it. The higher the number, the higher the “privileges” for modified
that user. A user level of “0” would allow “browsing” only • A successful download is made to a Controller
with no command capability. • A project is removed.
Configure System Enabled S3 Function Block Logic

When selected, this option allows the user access to The S 3 software allows users to customize application
the engineering and configuration aspects of the S 3 software with the use of function block logic. For SIL
software suite. This includes the ability to make, move, certified systems, SIL rated function blocks must be
configure and delete ports and the ability to create or used to comply with the SIL-2 certification.
modify points like fire detectors, gas detectors, analog
transmitters, digital inputs, etc. attached to one or more The SIL rated function blocks and associated input and
of the available ports. output links are color coded red to help the user identify
quickly if there are any non-compliant blocks. Refer to
Quit “Online” Operations Enabled Appendix B for a list of available function blocks.
When selected, the user is able to quit online operations Clearly separate safety-related function logic from
and return to the S 3 main screen for access to the non‑interfering logic. Place all safety functions on their
various engineering and maintenance utilities. own logic pages, and place all non-interfering functions
on their own logic pages.
Port Diagnostics Viewing Enabled
NOTE
When selected, when online the user can access It is the user’s responsibility to test, verify and
the port diagnostics screen. This screen allows the validate all safety related custom logic for
user to view details about the operation of all active conformance to the code.
communication ports, whether serial or ethernet. This
would typically be used by a technician responsible for
troubleshooting connectivity between the S3 station and
any attached systems.
5.1 9 95-8599
PROOF TESTING aim INPUT CHANNEL PROOF TEST
Tools Required: None
After installation and start-up have been completed,
Proof Tests must be performed for the Det-Tronics EQP
1. Bypass the safety function and take appropriate
Safety System.
action to avoid a false trip.
Personnel performing Proof Test procedures must be
2. Retrieve any diagnostics via the EQP controller and
competent to perform the task. All Proof Test results
take appropriate action.
must be recorded, analyzed, and any errors in the safety
functionality must be corrected. The Proof Tests must be
3. Using the connected 4-20 mA device, input a high
performed at a frequency as shown in the following table.
alarm current level to each configured channel
and verify correct operation at the AIM by the local
WARNING
channel LED turning red on that channel and no
To prevent undesired actuation of alarm equipment,
others. Verify that the correct alarm is displayed at
systems or signaling devices, be sure to secure
the EQP controller for that channel and no others.
these devices prior to performing the test.
4. Using the connected 4-20 mA device, input an
warning
under-current level to each configured channel
Failure to perform the specified testing and
and verify correct operation at the AIM by the local
inspection may lower or void the SIL rating for the
channel LED turning amber on that channel and
product or system.
no others. Verify that an under-current condition is
correctly displayed at the EQP controller for that
EDIO INPUT CHANNEL PROOF TEST channel and no others.
5. Remove the bypass and otherwise restore normal
operation.
Initiate the input channel via the connected contact
closure device. Verify correct operation at the EDIO
by the local channel LED turning red. If the input is X3301 VISUAL FIELD INSPECTION PROOF TEST
classified as a flame or gas device, verify correct alarm
Visual inspection of all Safety- Certified X33 01
display at the EQP controller.
Multispectrum IR Flame Detectors shall be conducted
weekly to confirm that there are no obstructions in
EDIO OUTPUT CHANNEL PROOF TEST the optical field of view. Corrective action will include
removal of such impediments should they exist.
Initiate the EDIO output channel by the user logic or

activate the associated input devices (EDIO input, flame
detectors, gas detectors, etc.). Verify correct operation
at the EDIO by the local channel LED turning red. Verify
that the end device connected to the EDIO channel is
activated.
Proof Test Name Commissioning Frequency per Year

EDIO Input Channel Proof Test Yes 1
EDIO Output Channel Proof Test Yes 1
AIM Input Channel Proof Test Yes 1
As needed, depending on level and
X3301 Visual Field Inspection Proof Test Yes
type of contaminants present
X3301 Mag oi Proof Test Yes 1
As needed, depending on level and
PIRECL Visual Field Inspection Proof Test Yes
type of contaminants present
PIRECL Gas Response Proof Test Yes 1
EQP User Logic Verification Yes —
5.1 10 95-8599
X3301 MAGNETIC Oi PROOF TEST EQP USER LOGIC VERIFICATION
Tools Required: All user Safety Logic needs to be fully tested and
• Magnetic oi test tool (part number 102740-002) verified using the safety inputs and outputs. This is a
commissioning activity, however, if logic is modified
All flame detectors must be performance tested using in the future, proof testing must be repeated. If the
the Magnetic oi Procedure and inspected to ensure that Controller is replaced, project information must be
they are capable of providing expected performance loaded into the new Controller and verified. The CRC
and protection. Note that the Magnetic oi Procedure of project related data is calculated and saved by the
and Manual oi Tests are not interference free. During controller after each project download. The project CRC
these tests the unit is not performing normal flame can be viewed on the Controller’s display under User
detection functions. Model X3301 provides an onboard Logic/General Info/Logic CRC. The project CRC should
status LED, which indicates Green color when internal be recorded and saved when proof testing is completed.
operational parameters are normal. Upon successful The project CRC from the Controller must be compared
completion of the Magnetic oi test, the LED changes to the saved value when a Controller is replaced to avoid
to a Red color and an alarm status is sent to the EQP complete proof testing of the system.
controller. In the event the proof test is unsuccessful, the
LED remains Green and the controller does not indicate
a fire alarm. INSTALLATION
General installation instructions are found in the
PIRECL VISUAL FIELD INSPECTION PROOF TEST instruction manual for the EQP system, form number
Tools Required: None 95‑8533.
Visual inspection of all Safety-Certified PIRECL Gas Like other Det-Tronics EQP products, the ingress
Detectors shall be conducted weekly to confirm that no protection rating of the EQP Safety Controller, EDIO,
external blockage of gas/vapor path into the sensing and AIM is IP20. It will be necessary to mount the
chamber exists, e.g. debris, trash, snow, mud, external EQP Safety Controller, EDIO, and AIM in a suitable
equipment, etc. Corrective action shall include removal enclosure to provide mechanical and ingress protection
of such impediments should they exist. All gas detectors appropriate to the particular application. X3301 is IP66
must be inspected to ensure that they are capable of minimum and PIRECL is IP67 minimum.
providing expected performance and protection. Model
PIRECL provides an onboard status LED that indicates Access can be restricted by mounting the EQP
Green color upon inspection when internal operational controller in a locked enclosure.
parameters are normal. Abnormal operating parameters
are indicated by Yellow color (Fault) or Red color (Alarm). Commissioning Personnel
The Safety Certified EQP System can be commissioned
PIRECL GAS RESPONSE PROOF TEST by any qualified person with knowledge of EQP System
Tools Required: instruments and the configuration device being used.
• Calibration Gas Kit (part number 006468‑001)

available from Det-Tronics
SUITABLE APPLICATIONS
This proof test, commonly referred to as a “gas bump The EQP Safety System can be used to provide safety
test”, requires application of high accuracy compressed functions up to Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL 2). It can be
calibration gas to the detector while in NORMAL used in low demand applications only.
operational mode and inspecting the signal output level
to ensure that the signal output is accurately indicative of Typical low demand applications are:
the applied test gas concentration.
• Fire and Gas protection systems, which monitor for the
When test gas is flowing into the detector, inspection presence of fire or a release of gas, and annunciate/
of proper gas response can be made by reading the release when demanded upon.
output displayed on the controller. Criteria for inspection
pass is a response signal within ±3% of applied gas In this case, the process safety time must be greater
concentration (50% LEL test concentration applied). than the response time of the EQP Safety System.
If response test is not within acceptable limits, then a
Full Calibration procedure must be performed and Gas
Response Proof Test re-performed.
5.1 11 95-8599
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS S3 Safety System Software
Programming, downloading safety-related parameters
System Application Restrictions
and programs and switching between operating states
The following application level restrictions have been is carried out via an engineering workstation using S 3
assumed: Software.
• The EQP system is only used for safety applications
that are low demand according to IEC 61508 Access to the Programming Interface shall only be
definitions. permitted for authorized and suitably qualified
personnel. Access must be restricted by the use of
• Only Det-Tronics EQP system devices may be passwords (and the options to do this are provided
connected to EQPSL network (closed network). for within S 3 Software) and/or some other forms of
• Physical EQPSL network topology is limited to a single restricting access.
loop.
• Indication of degraded conditions through opening of The Programming Interface may be used as the
the EQP controller’s fault relay must be investigated Operator Interface, but use of the Programming Interface
and the conditions corrected within time period must be restricted to authorized and qualified personnel.
determined by SIF verification calculations for the
particular application. Instructions for using S 3 and typical application
examples are provided in the S 3 Instruction Manual
• Periodic proof testing of trip signals through (number 95‑8560).
EQPSL network at least once per 5 years (1 year
recommended).
Hardware Fault Tolerance, Safe Failure Fraction and
• Periodic proof test of input sensors at least once per 3
Sub-System Type
years (1 year recommended).
• Product life limited to 20 years. The EQP Safety System is a Type B system, with a
hardware fault tolerance of 0 and a safe failure fraction
• The EQP System is operated within the environmental of >90%. It is, therefore, suitable for use in safety
conditions described in the Specifications section of functions requiring a safety integrity level of 2.
EQP Instruction Manual (number 95-8533).
Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications

Application Standards
This Section gives a basic introduction to calculating the
The EQP Safety System is certified to meet the average probability of failure on demand (PFDavg) for a
requirements of a number of application standards safety function incorporating the EQP Safety System.
that are listed in this Safety Manual and on the exida®
certificate. Users must ensure that they comply with For the purpose of this example, the following
all the requirements of the standard, not just those that assumptions have been made:
apply to the EQP Safety System.
• All components are certified as suitable for use in SIL
2 safety-related applications.
Operator Interface
• All elements are used in 1oo1 arrangements.
The EQP Safety System may be connected to an • Any Mean Time To Restore (MTTR) less than 48 hours
operator interface, matrix panels, mimic panels and is negligible.
switches.
• The approximation PFDavg = 1/2 T1 lDU is valid for
These interfaces allow the operator to monitor the the proof test interval considered.
operation of the system and diagnose system faults.
PFDavg for a particular safety function is the sum of the
The EQP Safety System will allow detected faults (from probabilities of the average failure on demand of each
line supervision monitoring, internal diagnostics etc.) to element of the system, taking into account the proof test
be displayed or indicated. interval of each element.
5.1 12 95-8599
Table 1 provides the low demand EQP SIL 2 Safety Example 2 (Figure 3B)
Function model and recommendations for complex
Gas alarm from a PIRECL and output to an EDIO.
modeling (see Note 3).
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +
PFDavg for each element is calculated according
0.1 x 10 -3 + valve & supply = 1.16 x 10 -3 + valve & supply
to the equation above, where lDU is the undetected
dangerous failure rate per 109 hours and T1 is the proof
test interval. (In this example, T1 is chosen as 1 year Example 3 (Figure 3C)
(8760 hours) for all components of the safety function).
Input from an EDIO and output to the same EDIO.
The value of PFDavg for the system is the sum of
PFDavg = 0.003 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +
PFDavg for the individual elements.
note
Using the table given in the standard, this value would
The EQP system is an energize to trip system.
be suitable for a low demand SIL 2 safety function.
The power supply to the output device should
Other conditions (hardware fault tolerance and safe
be monitored and annunciated when lost. This is
failure fraction) also allow its use in a SIL 2 application.
counted as a Dangerous Detected (DD) fault. If the
power supply is not monitored, it must be counted
See IEC 61508-6 for a more comprehensive guide to the
as a Dangerous Undetected (DU) fault.
calculation of PFDavg.
Example 1 (Figure 3A)

Fire input from an X3301 and output to an EDIO.
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10 -3 + (0.38 x 10 -3 + 0.1 x 10 -3) +

Table 1—EQP SIL 2 Safety Function Model - Example
Safety Function Safety Function Total Failure DU SU DD

SFF
INPUT OUTPUT Rate (Failure to Trip) (False Trip) (Detected Fault)
EDIO OUTPUT
X3301 Fire Input 96.6% 7,070 FIT 242 FIT 226 FIT 2,980 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
EDIO Fire Input

EDIO OUTPUT
(OPEN & SHORT 96.9% 3,580 FIT 110 FIT 130 FIT 2,020 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
MONITORING)
EDIO OUTPUT
PIRECL Gas Input 96.2% 6,420 FIT 242 FIT 316 FIT 3,920 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
EDIO Gas Input

EDIO OUTPUT
(OPEN & SHORT 96.9% 3,580 FIT 110 FIT 130 FIT 2,020 FIT
(OPEN MONITORING)
MONITORING)
NOTE 1: The table includes consideration to a 246 node system with 6 Network Extenders, 14 Physical Layer Repeaters, maximum
cable distance, and a 1-year Proof Test Interval (NFPA 72 requirement) with usage of less than 65% of the SIL 2 budget.
NOTE 2: One EDIO provides both the input channel and the output channel.
NOTE 3: For complex modeling of the EQP System, reference the exida® tool at www.exida.com.
5.1 13 95-8599
X3301 Simplex EQ3xxx EQ3730EDIO
IR FLAME EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
DETECTOR CONTROLLER* EDIO**
λDU = 87.5 + 22.8

λDU = 133 T1 = 1 YEAR λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve***
T1 = 1 YEAR PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3 T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10-3 + 0.1 x 10-3) PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply
λDU IS FAILURE RATE PER 109 HOURS, TP OF 1 YEAR = 8760 HOURS, PFDavg IS THE PROBABILITY OF FAILURE ON DEMAND.
*Includes Worst Case Safety Communication

(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) **Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
***See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications
Figure 3A—X3301 Input in a Typical Low Demand Application
PIRECL Simplex EQ3xxx EQ3730EDIO

ECLIPSE GAS EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
DETECTOR CONTROLLER* EDIO**
λDU = 132 λDU = 87.5 + 22.8 λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve***

T1 = 1 YEAR
T1 = 1 YEAR T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3
PFDavg = 0.58 x 10-3 PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply
+ 0.1 x 10-3)
*Includes Worst Case Safety Communication

(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) **Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
***See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications
Figure 3B—PIRECL Input in a Typical Low Demand Application
EQ3730EDIO Simplex EQ3xxx EQ3730EDIO

SWITCH EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY EQP SAFETY VALVE
EDIO* CONTROLLER** EDIO***
λDU = 87.5 + 22.8

λDU = 0.68 T1 = 1 YEAR
λDU = 21.8 λDU Valve****
λDU Switch T1 = 1 YEAR
PFDavg = (0.38 x 10-3
T1 = 1 YEAR and
PFDavg = 0.003 x 10-3 PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3 Power Supply
+ 0.1 x 10-3)
* Single Input Configuration with Open & Short Monitoring.
λDU for Components Common to both Inputs
and Outputs Contained in EDIO and Output
Calculation
PFDavg = Σ (1/2 • T1 • λDU) ** Includes Worst Case Safety Communication
(λDU = 22.8, PFDavg = 0.1 x 10-3)
***Single Output Configuration, Monitored for Opens
****See note in Calculating PFD for Low Demand Applications
Figure 3C—EDIO Input in a Typical Low Demand Application
5.1 14 95-8599
System Response Time Product Repair
The EQP Safety System will have a typical response The EQP Controller and Field Devices are not field-
time of less than 1 second, to which must be added repairable and any internal device repairs must be
the response time of the final elements to give the total conducted at the factory. No firmware changes are
response time. permitted or authorized. All failures indicated by
internal diagnostics or Proof Tests that cannot be
The worst case theoretical response time of the EQP resolved through the troubleshooting and maintenance
Safety System, the time taken from an input transition procedures described in the manual must be reported
being detected to an output being asserted, is to the manufacturer. Refer to the DEVICE REPAIR AND
estimated by the following: RETURN section of the EQP system instruction manual,
number 95-8533.
• Detection at field device to the Controller over
EQPSL network
Spare Parts
– Small system <100 field devices < 3.2 seconds
(user logic constrained to 0.5 seconds) Refer to the REPLACEMENT PARTS section of the
instruction manual. Safety certification is based on a
– Large system >100 field devices < 9.1 seconds sufficient number of spares to achieve a 24 hour mean
(user logic constrained to 1.5 seconds). time to repair.
• Worst case response times assume user logic

Applicable Standards
execution time is constrained to
– Small system < 0.5 seconds • IEC 61508:2000. “Functional Safety of Electrical/
Electronic/Programmable Electronic Safety-related
– Large system < 1.5 seconds.
Systems”.
• Worst case Controller to EDIO output < 6.3 seconds. • IEC 61511:2003. “Functional Safety - Safety
Instrumented Systems for the Process Sector”.
• Worst case response times assume a high level of
lost messages due to internal or external influences,
and three subsequent retries. Product Certifications
note
The worst case theoretical response time, as FM ®
required by IEC 61508, will only occur once per APPROVED
1,000,000 trips. It must occur during the worst

case degraded communication conditions FM, CSA, ATEX, IECEx, CE, exida, and others.
possible without generating a communication fault.
FMEDA Report available.
NOTE
The process safety time must be compared with For complete information regarding performance,
the response time of the entire safety function. In installation, operation, maintenance and specifications
addition to the response time of the EQP Safety of the Eagle Quantum Premier system, refer to
System, the response time of the input sensors and instruction manual 95‑8533.
output actuators must be included.
5.1 15 95-8599
APPENDIX A
SUMMARY OF SAFETY RELATED DATA
CERTIFICATION AND FAILURE RATE DATA

All Safety-Certified EQP devices are certified compliant to:
IEC 61508: 2000
Type B Device
Systematic Capability: SIL 2 certified
HFT: 0
Low Demand Mode
PFDavg should be calculated for any safety instrumented function using the EQP System.
(Refer to tables and / or FMEDA report for necessary information, including DU rate).
Safety Accuracy: Specified per device
Safety Response Time: See ‘System Response Time’ section
5.1 16 95-8599
IEC 61508 Failure Rates
Certified for use up to SIL 2 Configuration 1oo1D
Architecture Type B Hardware Fault Tolerance 0
Safe Failure Fraction > 90%
Failure Rate Data
Part Model lDU (dangerous undetected failure rate per 109 hours) SFF %
EQP Safety Controller EQ3xxx 87.5 96.7
Common = 20.9 97.1

EDIO Safety Module -
EQ3730EDIO Input Monitored for Opens = 6.6 93.0
Configured as Input*
Input Monitored for Opens & Shorts = 0.68 99.0
EDIO Safety Module - Common = 20.9 97.1

EQ3730EDIO
Configured as Output* Output Monitored for Opens, Opens & Shorts = 0.92 98.9
Common = 12 98.1
AIM Safety Module EQ3710AIM
Per Input Channel = 5.16 93.0
X3301 IR Flame Detector X3301 133 96.3
Eclipse IR Gas Detector Model PIRECL 132 95.5
EQP Safety Communications 22.8 N/A
* “Common” are components common to both inputs and outputs. For lDU calculation:
Example 1: Input and output on same EDIO
lDU = Common + Input + Output
lDU = 20.9 + 0.68 + 0.92 = 22.5
Example 2: Input and output on different EDIOs
lDU = lDU EDIO #1 +lDU EDIO #2
= (Common + Input) + (Common + Output)
= (20.9 + 0.68) + (20.9 + 0.92) = 43.4
Product Life EQ3xxx (Controller): 10-25 years, based on manufacturer data.
Product Life EQ3730EDIO: 6-29 years, based on manufacturer data.
Product Life EQ3710AIM: 6-29 years, based on manufacturer data.
Product Life X3301: 12-27 years, based on manufacturer data.
Product Life PIRECL: 5-40 years, based on manufacturer data.
All failure rate data for SIL verification is in the FMEDA report, which is available upon request.
5.1 17 95-8599
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
DD Dangerous Detected
DU Dangerous Undetected
EQP Eagle Quantum Premier System
EQPSL/SLC Eagle Quantum Premier Safety Loop
/ Signaling Line Circuit
FMEDA Failure Mode Effects and
Diagnostics Analysis
HART Highway Addressable Remote
Transducer
HFT Hardware Fault Tolerance
PFD Probability of Failure on Demand
(Probability of Dangerous Failure)
PFDavg Average Probability of Failure on
Demand
SD Safe Detected
SFF Safe Failure Fraction
SIF Safety Instrumented Function
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SIS Safety Instrumented System
SU Safe Undetected
5.1 18 95-8599
Appendix B
EQP CONTROLLER LOGIC GATE TABLE
USER-DOCUMENTATION
The “SIL” column indicates if the gate is suitable for use with alarm processing with a 61508 approved system. Gates
that utilize stored values which are not duplicated, or that depend on the floating-point or string libraries are not safety
rated. For detailed information about a gate, refer to the help file for that gate in the S³ EQP logic window.
Gate Name Description SIL
ABS Absolute Value. The values can be integer, double or float. The result Yes for all but
will be of the same type as the input value; e.g. –23 = 23 floating-point
values
ACCALM Access Alarm. This function is used to provide an interface to the No

Controller’s alarm list. This can be used to read alarm information from
the Controller’s alarm list.
ADD Addition. The values can be Boolean, integer, double or float. All items Yes for all but
must be of the same type. ADD reads all the values, performs an ADD floating-point
function and writes the result. values
ALMTGR Add an Alarm to the Alarm List. This function is used to add an alarm No
to the Controller’s alarm list. This can be used to trigger and log and
display alarms that are initiated by user logic.
AND AND. AND reads all the values, performs a bitwise AND function and Yes
writes the result.
ANDW AND Word. The values can be integer or double. All values must be of Yes
the same type and the result will be of the same type. All of the bits of
the word are operated on.
AVG Average. The input values can be integer, double or float. All values Yes for all but
must be of the same type and the result will be of the same type. floating-point
Average is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the value by the values
number of values. (8.0 + 7.0 + 8.0) / 3 = 7.6.
BINT Boolean to Integer. The input is a Boolean. If the input is False the Yes
output will be a zero and if the input is True the output will be a one.
BTW Between. The input values can be integer, double or float. All items Yes for all but
must be of the same type. There are three input items. Two are the floating-point
comparison values and the third is the compare item. If the compare values
item is equal to or between the comparison values, a Boolean True is
output, if not a Boolean False is output; e.g. if the <= input is 100 and
the IN input is 50 and the >= input is 0 then the output would be True.
5.1 19 95-8599
BTWT Between Time Compare. There are three input time/date items. Two are No
the comparison values and the third is the compare item. If the compare
item is equal to or between the comparison values, a Boolean True is
output, if not a Boolean False is output; e.g. if the <= input is 15:00:00
and the IN input is 12:00:00 and the >= input is 06:00:00 then the
output would be True.
CEIL Ceiling. This function performs a round up. The input is a float. The No
result will be a double; e.g. –2.8 = -2, 2.8 = 3, -1 = -1
CTD Down Counter. There are three inputs. They are “count down (CD)” No
a Boolean, the “Load (LD)” a Boolean, and the “Preset Value (PV)” a
double.
When the LD input is False, the counter counts down. One count for
each CD transition from False to True.
The output is True if the current value is less than or equal to zero. The
counter stops counting when the current value reaches -2,147,483,648.
When the LD is True, the PV is loaded into the current value to initialize
the counter.
CTD-SIL SIL Down Counter. The SIL Down Counter operates the same as the Yes
standard CTD, but provides additional error checking in the Controller
against random memory error.
CTU Up Counter. There are three inputs. The “count up (CU)” a Boolean, the No
“Reset (R)” a Boolean, and the “Preset Value (PV)” a double.
When the R input is False, the counter counts up. One count for each
CU transition from False to True.
The output is True if the current value is greater than or equal to
the PV. The counter stops counting when the current value reaches
2,147,483,647. When R is True the current value is set to 0.
CTU-SIL SIL Up Counter. The SIL Up Counter operates the same as the standard Yes
CTU, but has additional error checking in the Controller against random
memory error.
CTUD Up/Down Counter. This has five inputs. The “count up (CU)” a Boolean, No
the “count Down (CD)” a Boolean, the “Reset (R)” a Boolean, the “Load
(LD)” a Boolean and the “Preset Value(PV)” a double.
When the LD and R inputs both are False, the counter counts.
One count up for each CU transition from False to True.
One count down for each CD transition from False to True.
If both CU & CD transition, the counter will count up.
If the current value is greater than or equal to the PV, QU output is True.
If the current value is less than or equal to zero, QD output is True.
The counter stops counting when the current value reaches

2,147,483,647 or -2,147,483,648.
When the R is True the current value is set to zero.
When the LD is True the PV is loaded into the current value to initialize
the counter.
5.1 20 95-8599
CTUD-SIL SIL Up/Down Counter. The SIL Up Counter operates the same as Yes
the standard CTU, but has additional error checking in the Controller
against random memory error.
DBLFLT Double to Float. The input double is converted to a float. No
DBLINT Double to Integer. The input double is converted to an integer. Yes
DBLSTR Double to String. When the enable input is True, the 32-bit double input No
value is converted to a string.
DIV Divide. The input values can be integer, double or float. The inputs must Yes for all but
be of the same type. The output will be of the same type as the inputs. floating-point
values
ET Equal To. The input values can be integer, double or float. The inputs Yes for all but
must be of the same type. The output is a Boolean. NOTE: When floating-point
floats are used in a comparison for Equal (=), the comparison will be values
true if the values are within 0.01 of each other.
EVTTGR Add an Event to the Controller Alarm List. This function is used to add No
an event to the Controller’s alarm list. This can be used to trigger, log
and display events that are initiated by user logic.
FLR Floor. This function performs a round down. The input value is a float. No
The result will be a double; e.g. –2.8 = -3, 2.8 = 2, -1 = -1
FLTSTR Float to String. When the enable input is True, the floating-point input No
value is converted to a string. The precision input determines the
number of digits to the right of the decimal point. (0 - 6)
FRAC Fraction. The output will be the fractional part of the input. No
The input value is a float. The result will be a float; e.g. 123.456 = 0.456.
GT Greater Than. The input values can be integer, double or float and must Yes for all but
be the same type. The output is a Boolean. (X > Y) floating-point
values
GE Greater Than or Equal To. The Input values can be integer, double or Yes for all but
float and must be the same type. The result is a Boolean. (X >= Y). floating-point
values
IF IF. The values at the input connection “True” can be Boolean, integer, No
double, string or float. If the Selector input is True, the value at the
“True” connection is passed to the output. If the Selector Input is False
the output will be set to the value determined at last scan when the
Selector was True. The IF function is a way to preserve a value after the
Boolean input goes False.
INPUT Input. The Input can be any value. The input function is used to select Yes for all but
an input that will be directed to logic. floating-point
and string
values
5.1 21 95-8599
INTBOL Integer to Boolean. If the input is equal to zero, the output will be False. Yes
If the input is not equal to zero, the output will be True.
INTDBL Integer to Double. The input integer is converted to a double. Yes
INTFLT Integer to Float. The Input integer is converted to a float. The result will No
be a float.
INTSTR Integer to String. When the enable input is True, the 16-bit integer input No
value is converted to a string.
LMT Limit. The values can be integer, double or float. All inputs must be of Yes for all but
the same type. The output will be of the same type as the inputs. The floating-point
input is compared against the high limit. If the input is greater than the values
high limit, the output will be the high limit value. If the input is less than
the high limit, the input is compared against the low limit. If the input is
less than the low limit, the output is the low limit value. Otherwise the
output is the value of the input.
LT Less Than. The values can be integer, double or float. The result is a Yes for all but
Boolean. floating-point
values
LE Less Than or Equal To. The values can be integer, double or float. The Yes for all but
result is a Boolean. floating-point
values
MAX Maximum Select. The values can be integer, double or float. The input Yes for all but
with the highest value will be passed to the output. The result will be of floating-point
the same type as the inputs. values
MEDIAN Median. The input values can be integer, double or float. All values must Yes for all but
be of the same type and the result will be of the same type. Median floating-point
is the value midway between the values. Definition: a) designating the values
middle number in a series containing an odd number of items; e.g. 7
in the series 1, 4, 7, 16, 43; b) designating the middle number midway
between the two middle numbers in a series containing an even
number of items; e.g. 10 in the series 3, 4, 8, 12, 46, 72.
MIN Minimum select. The input values can be integer, double or float. All Yes for all but
inputs must be of the same type. The input with the lowest value will be floating-point
passed to the output. The result will be of the same type as the inputs. values
MOD Modulo. The input values can be integer or double. The result is the Yes
same type as the inputs. The mod operator returns the remainder
obtained by dividing its operands. In other words: 9 mod 4 is 1.
MBREAD MODBUS Read. This function block performs an asynchronous No

MODBUS read operation.
MBWRT MODBUS Write. This function block performs an asynchronous No

MODBUS write operation.
5.1 22 95-8599
MOFN M of N. All of the Boolean inputs are examined for a True condition. The Yes
result is compared against the Preset (PR). The output “>” is True if the
count is greater than the PR. The output “=” is True if the count is equal
to the PR. The output “<” is True if the count is less than the PR.
MOSP Multiple One Shot Pulse. The inputs are Boolean. The output is a No
Boolean. Each input has a one-shot pulse function. The output is the
“OR” of all of the inputs after the result of each one-shot pulse function.
MUL Multiply. The input values can be integer, double or float. The inputs Yes for all but
must be of the same type. The result type is the same as the inputs. floating-point
values
MUX Multiplex. The input values can be Boolean, integer, double, string or Yes for all but
float. All input values must be the same type. The output is the item floating-point
indexed by the selector input. The output will be the same type as the and string
inputs. values
NBITS Number of Bits. The output will be the sum of all the binary inputs. Yes
NE Not Equal To. The values can be integer, double or float. The result is a Yes for all but
Boolean. floating-point
values
NOT NOT. The input values can be Boolean, integer or double. The output is Yes
the bitwise NOT of the input.
ODD ODD. The input values can be integer or double. The function Yes
determines if the input value is odd. The result is a Boolean.
OR OR. OR reads all the Boolean values, performs a bitwise OR function Yes
and writes the result. The result is a Boolean.
ORW OR WORD. The input values can be integer or double. All values must Yes
be of the same type and the result will be of the same type. This
function performs a logical OR of the inputs.
OSP One shot pulse. The input is a Boolean. The output is a Boolean. No
When the input goes True, the output goes True for one program scan.
The output will be False the next time the function block is executed,
regardless of the input.
OSP-SIL One shot pulse SIL. The input is a Boolean. The output is a Boolean. Yes
When the input goes True, the output goes True for one program scan.
The output will be False the next time the function block is executed,
regardless of the input.
OUTPUT Output. The output can be any value. The output function is used to Yes for all but
select an output that will be directed from logic. floating-point
and string
values
PACK16 Bit Packing. This function performs a bitwise packing of the Boolean Yes
inputs into an integer.
5.1 23 95-8599
PKDT Pack Date/Time. This function performs packing of 6 integers into a No
Time/Date data type.
PULSER Pulser. This function block creates periodic pulse of defined ON and
OFF time-values. The ON and OFF time-values may be different.
RND Round. Half way values are rounded to the nearest even number No
(Bankers rounding). The input value is a float. The result will be a
double; e.g. 5.5 rounds to 6, 6.5 rounds to 6, -5.5 rounds to -6, -6.5
rounds to -6.
RS Reset/Set. If Reset input is set to True, then the output is False. If Set No
input is set to True and Reset input is False, then the output is True. If
both are False, then there is no change in the output. This gate is Reset
dominant bistable. If the Reset input is True, then the output is False,
regardless of the Set input.
RS-SIL SIL Reset/Set gate. The SIL Reset/Set gate operates the same as the Yes
standard RS, but provides duplicate storage for the persistent value.
RTM Retentive Timer. This function block performs a Retentive On Timer No

function. It provides a delay of time PT from the rising edge of input IN.
RTM-SIL SIL Retentive Timer. The SIL Retentive Timer operates the same as Yes
the standard Retentive Timer, but provides duplicate storage for the
persistent values.
SCALE Scale. The input values can be integer, double or float. All the values No
must be of the same type. The output will be of the same type. The first
value is the input. The second value is the low range for the input. The
third value is the high range for the input. The fourth value is the low
range for the output and the fifth value is the high range for the output.
SEL Selector. The True and False input values can be Boolean, integer, Yes for all but
double, string or float. They must be of the same type and the output floating-point
will be of this type. The selector input value is a Boolean. If the selector and string
is False, then the value at the False connection is passed to the output. values
If the selector is True, then the value at the True connection is passed to
the output.
SQR Square. The input value is a float. The result will be a float. No
SQRT Square Root. The input value is a float. The result will be a float. No
SR Set/Reset. This function block performs a Set-Reset function. If the No

Set input is set to True, then the output is True. If the Reset input is set
to True and Set input is False, then the output is False. This gate is the
Set dominant bistable. If the Set input is True, then the output is True,
regardless of the Reset input.
SR-SIL SIL Set/Reset. The SIL Set/Reset gate operates the same as the Yes
standard Set/Reset gate, but provides duplicate storage for the
persistent value.
5.1 24 95-8599
STRAPD String Append. When the enable input is True, source string 2 is No
appended to the end of source string 1 and placed in the destination
string.
STRCPY String copy. When the enable input is True, the source string is copied No
to the destination string.
STNCPY String “n” copy. This function is used to extract parts from a string. No
When the enable is True, not more then ‘Count’ characters starting with
character ‘Index’ are copied to the destination string.
STREQ String Equal. When the enable input is True, source string (S1) is No
compared to source string (S2).
SUB Subtract. The input values can be integer, double or float. The output Yes for all but
will be the same type as the input. floating-point
TDSTR Time and Date to String. When the enable input is True, the time/date No
value is converted to a string. The input value can come from any valid
time/date source. The output format is selectable.
TOF Off Timer. TOF provides a delay of time from the falling edge of the No
input.
TOF-SIL The SIL version of the Off Timer is the same as the normal TOF function, Yes
with the addition of duplicate storage for elapsed time variable.
TON On Timer. TON provides a delay of time from the rising edge of the No
input
TON-SIL The SIL version of the On Timer is the same as the normal TON Yes
function, with the addition of duplicate storage for elapsed time variable.
TRUNC Truncate. The Input value is a float. The result will be a double; e.g. No
123.456 = 123
UNPK16 Unpack. The input value Is an integer. This function performs a bitwise Yes
unpacking of the input into Booleans.
UPKDT Unpack Date/Time. This function performs an unpacking of a Date/ No

Time to 6 integers.
XOR Exclusive OR. The input values are Booleans. The output is True when Yes
the number of True inputs is odd.
XORW XOR WORD. The input values can be integer or double. All values Yes
must be of the same type, and the result will be of the same type. This
function performs a logical XOR of the inputs.
5.1 25 95-8599
95-8599
Detector Electronics Corporation

6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA
T: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473
F: 952.829.8750
W: http://www.det-tronics.com
X3301 Multispectrum PointWatch Eclipse® FlexVu® Universal Display Eagle Quantum Premier®
IR Flame Detector IR Combustible Gas Detector w/ GT3000 Toxic Gas Detector Safety System E: det-tronics@det-tronics.com
Det-Tronics, the DET-TRONICS logo, FlexVu, Eclipse, and Eagle Quantum Premier are registered trademarks or trademarks of Detector Electronics
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
© Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2013. All rights reserved.

Instructions 95-8533: Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions 95-8533: Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions 95-8533: Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/Releasing System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions 95-8533

Eagle Quantum Premier®

14.1 Rev: 5/13 95-8533

Communication Network Fault Operation...................... 2-4 Backup Battery....................................................... 3-5

Multiple Wiring Faults..................................................... 2-5 Battery Charger...................................................... 3-5

System Controller....................................................... 4-1 eq2220GFM ground fault monitor......................... 4-18

Controller Audible Alarm................................................. 4-6 EQ25xxARM Agent Release Module......................... 4-20

Power-Up Sequence.................................................... 4-13

analog input module................................................. 4-14

intelligent protection module............................. 4-15

troubleshooting........................................................... 5-6 appendix C — atex and iecex certification............C-1

REPLACEMENT PARTS....................................................... 5-8 Appendix D — EQP Marine, USCG Approval............D-1

DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN........................................... 5-8 Appendix E — CE Mark...................................................E-1

ORDERING INFORMATION................................................. 5-8 appendix f — rocker switch table......................... f-1

appendix g — DEVICE model matriCES.................... g-1

Eagle Quantum Premier®

DANGER! 2. The wiring procedures in this manual are intended

14.1 ©Detector Electronics Corporation 2013 Rev: 5/13 95-8533

For complete system integration, the Controller has

14.1 2-1 95-8533

COMBUSTIBLE, TOXIC, CONTACT

CONTROLNET OPTIONAL ONBOARD

– + – + CHANNELS CAN BE CONFIGURED AS INPUTS,

SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)

HARDWIRED I/O RS-485 MODBUS

Figure 2-1—Block Diagram of Eagle Quantum Premier System

14.1 2-2 95-8533

Table 2-3—Eagle Quantum Premier Status Update Rates

*ASH Module cannot be used with EQ3150 Controller.

14.1 2-3 95-8533

The Controller executes program logic by starting with NODE 4 NODE 5

progressing onto subsequent pages of the same

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Every one hundred milliseconds, the Controller will

NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

start executing the user logic that is programmed into

EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER

Low Gas Lon Fault Ack Silence

Cancel Enter Next Previous Reset Acknowledge Silence

14.1 2-4 95-8533

NODE 1 Eagle Quantum Premier

Time & Date

MULTIPLE WIRING FAULTS

SYSTEM CONTROLLER LON

The Controller (see Figure 2-5) performs all RS-232 MODBUS

the system. The Controller supports both “Static” and

• “Real time” system clock ONE PROJECT FILE

• Vacuum fluorescent text based display that shows

14.1 2-5 95-8533

Bumpless transfer During a controller switchover

14.1 2-6 95-8533

EQ2220GFM Ground Fault Monitor

No more than six network extenders may be

When a network extender is installed in the

EQ21xxPS Series Power Supplies and

14.1 2-7 95-8533

Figure 2-10—DCIO Module

Figure 2-9—Enhanced Discrete Input/Output Module